WO2019098092A1 - Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method - Google Patents

Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019098092A1
WO2019098092A1 PCT/JP2018/041169 JP2018041169W WO2019098092A1 WO 2019098092 A1 WO2019098092 A1 WO 2019098092A1 JP 2018041169 W JP2018041169 W JP 2018041169W WO 2019098092 A1 WO2019098092 A1 WO 2019098092A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
block
unit
boundary
luminance correction
processing
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/041169
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
龍一 加納
安倍　清史
遠間　正真
西　孝啓
Original Assignee
パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ filed Critical パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ
Publication of WO2019098092A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019098092A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/85—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using pre-processing or post-processing specially adapted for video compression
    • H04N19/86—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using pre-processing or post-processing specially adapted for video compression involving reduction of coding artifacts, e.g. of blockiness

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, and a decoding method.
  • H.264 is used as a standard for coding a moving image.
  • H. H.265 is also referred to as HEVC (High Efficiency Video Coding).
  • the present disclosure aims to provide an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, or a decoding method that can improve the quality of a decoded image.
  • An encoding device includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to perform a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block. If the difference between the second block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction process for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is larger than a predetermined threshold value, deblocking filtering is performed on the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block. Apply and the deblocking filtering is not applied to the boundary if the difference is smaller than the threshold.
  • a decoding device includes a circuit and a memory, the circuit using the memory, a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block, and If the difference between the second block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction process for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is larger than a predetermined threshold, deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block. If the difference is smaller than the threshold, the deblocking filtering process is not applied to the boundary.
  • the present disclosure can provide an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, or a decoding method that can improve the quality of a decoded image.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the coding apparatus according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of block division in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a table showing transform basis functions corresponding to each transform type.
  • FIG. 4A is a view showing an example of the shape of a filter used in ALF.
  • FIG. 4B is a view showing another example of the shape of a filter used in ALF.
  • FIG. 4C is a view showing another example of the shape of a filter used in ALF.
  • FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating 67 intra prediction modes in intra prediction.
  • FIG. 5B is a flowchart for describing an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing.
  • FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating 67 intra prediction modes in intra prediction.
  • FIG. 5B is a flowchart for describing an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing.
  • FIG. 5C is a conceptual diagram for describing an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing.
  • FIG. 5D is a diagram illustrating an example of FRUC.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for describing pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along a motion trajectory.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram for describing pattern matching (template matching) between a template in a current picture and a block in a reference picture.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming uniform linear motion.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram for describing derivation of a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
  • FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing an overview of motion vector derivation processing in the merge mode.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram for describing derivation of a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
  • FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing an
  • FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for describing an overview of DMVR processing.
  • FIG. 9D is a diagram for describing an outline of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first mode of the deblocking filter process according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a Bs calculation method in the first aspect according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a first example of the Bs calculation process according to the first aspect of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a first example of the Bs calculation method in the first aspect according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a second example of the Bs calculation process according to the first aspect of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a second example of the Bs calculating method according to the first aspect of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a state of a target block and an adjacent block according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a state of a target block and an adjacent block according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a Bs calculation method in the second aspect according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a first example of the Bs calculation process in the second aspect according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a first example of the Bs calculation method in the second aspect according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a second example of the Bs calculation process according to the second aspect of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a second example of the Bs calculation method in the second aspect according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the deblocking filter process according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a Bs calculation method in the third aspect relating to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 26 is a flowchart of a first example of the Bs calculation process according to the third aspect of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a first example of a Bs calculation method in the third aspect according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 28 is a flowchart of a second example of the Bs calculation process according to the third aspect of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a second example of the Bs calculation method in the third aspect according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the deblocking filter process according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of a coding apparatus.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of a decoding device.
  • FIG. 33 is an overall configuration diagram of a content supply system for realizing content distribution service.
  • FIG. 33 is an overall configuration diagram of a content supply system for realizing content distribution service.
  • FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coding structure at the time of scalable coding.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coding structure at the time of scalable coding.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page.
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page.
  • FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a smartphone.
  • FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a smartphone.
  • An encoding device includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to perform a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block. If the difference between the second block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction process for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is larger than a predetermined threshold value, deblocking filtering is performed on the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block. Apply and the deblocking filtering is not applied to the boundary if the difference is smaller than the threshold.
  • the coding apparatus performs the deblocking filter process when the difference between the luminance correction parameter of the target block and the luminance correction parameter of the adjacent block is larger than the threshold.
  • block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved.
  • the coding apparatus does not perform deblocking filter processing when the difference is smaller than the threshold.
  • the encoding apparatus can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
  • the deblocking filter is applied to the boundary Processing may be applied.
  • the deblocking filter process may not be applied to the boundary.
  • the encoding apparatus can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
  • the brightness correction process may be a LIC (Local Illumination Compensation) process.
  • LIC Local Illumination Compensation
  • the deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than 0, and the difference is smaller than the threshold.
  • the deblocking filtering process may not be applied to the boundary by setting the Bs to 0.
  • the target block and the adjacent block may be unit blocks of prediction processing.
  • a decoding device includes a circuit and a memory, the circuit using the memory, a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block, and If the difference between the second block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction process for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is larger than a predetermined threshold, deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block. If the difference is smaller than the threshold, the deblocking filtering process is not applied to the boundary.
  • the said decoding apparatus performs a deblocking filter process, when the difference of the brightness correction parameter of an object block and the brightness correction parameter of an adjacent block is larger than a threshold value.
  • a deblocking filter process when the difference of the brightness correction parameter of an object block and the brightness correction parameter of an adjacent block is larger than a threshold value.
  • the deblocking filter is applied to the boundary Processing may be applied.
  • the deblocking filter process may not be applied to the boundary.
  • the decoding apparatus can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
  • the brightness correction process may be a LIC (Local Illumination Compensation) process.
  • LIC Local Illumination Compensation
  • the deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than 0, and the difference is smaller than the threshold.
  • the deblocking filtering process may not be applied to the boundary by setting the Bs to 0.
  • the target block and the adjacent block may be unit blocks of prediction processing.
  • An encoding method includes a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block, and a second luminance correction parameter used for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. If the difference between the correction parameter and the correction parameter is larger than a predetermined threshold value, deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block, and if the difference is smaller than the threshold value, the deblocking filter is applied to the boundary Do not apply processing.
  • the said encoding method performs a deblocking filter process, when the difference of the brightness correction parameter of an object block and the brightness correction parameter of an adjacent block is larger than a threshold value.
  • a threshold value As a result, block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved.
  • the encoding method does not perform deblocking filter processing when the difference is smaller than the threshold. Thereby, the said encoding method can suppress that deblocking filter processing is performed excessively.
  • a decoding method includes a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block, and a second luminance correction used for the luminance correction processing for an adjacent block adjacent to the target block.
  • Deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block if the difference between the parameter and the parameter is larger than a predetermined threshold, and the deblocking filtering is performed on the boundary if the difference is smaller than the threshold. Does not apply.
  • the said decoding method performs a deblocking filter process, when the difference of the brightness correction parameter of an object block and the brightness correction parameter of an adjacent block is larger than a threshold value.
  • a threshold value As a result, block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved.
  • the decoding method does not perform the deblocking filter process when the difference is smaller than the threshold. Thereby, the said decoding method can suppress that deblocking filter processing is performed excessively.
  • these general or specific aspects may be realized by a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a non-transitory recording medium such as a computer readable CD-ROM, and the system
  • the present invention may be realized as any combination of an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, and a storage medium.
  • Embodiment 1 First, an outline of the first embodiment will be described as an example of an encoding apparatus and a decoding apparatus to which the process and / or the configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure described later can be applied.
  • Embodiment 1 is merely an example of an encoding apparatus and a decoding apparatus to which the process and / or the configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure can be applied, and the processing and / or the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure
  • the configuration can also be implemented in a coding apparatus and a decoding apparatus that are different from the first embodiment.
  • the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment corresponds to the constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure among a plurality of constituent elements that configure the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus.
  • Replacing a component with a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure (2) A plurality of configurations constituting the encoding device or the decoding device with respect to the encoding device or the decoding device of the first embodiment
  • Addition of processing to the method performed by the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first embodiment, and / or a plurality of processes included in the method home Replacing a process corresponding to the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure with the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure after replacing some of the processes and arbitrary changes such as deletion.
  • the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure is a component of a part of the plurality of components constituting the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first aspect Implementing in combination with a component having a part of the functions to be provided or a component performing a part of the process performed by the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure (5)
  • the encoding apparatus according to the first embodiment Or a component having a part of functions provided by a part of a plurality of components constituting the decoding apparatus, or a plurality of components constituting the coding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first embodiment
  • Part of A component performing a part of the process performed by the component is a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, a component provided with a part of the function of the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, or the present Implementing in combination with a component that performs part of the processing performed by the components described in each aspect of the disclosure (6)
  • the manner of implementation of the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure is not limited to the above example.
  • it may be implemented in an apparatus used for a purpose different from the moving picture / image coding apparatus or the moving picture / image decoding apparatus disclosed in the first embodiment, or the process and / or the process described in each aspect.
  • the configuration may be implemented alone.
  • the processes and / or configurations described in the different embodiments may be implemented in combination.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of coding apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment.
  • the encoding device 100 is a moving image / image coding device that encodes a moving image / image in units of blocks.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 is an apparatus for encoding an image in units of blocks, and includes a dividing unit 102, a subtracting unit 104, a converting unit 106, a quantizing unit 108, and entropy coding.
  • Unit 110 inverse quantization unit 112, inverse transformation unit 114, addition unit 116, block memory 118, loop filter unit 120, frame memory 122, intra prediction unit 124, inter prediction unit 126, And a prediction control unit 128.
  • the encoding device 100 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory.
  • the processor controls the division unit 102, the subtraction unit 104, the conversion unit 106, the quantization unit 108, the entropy coding unit 110, and the dequantization unit 112.
  • the inverse transform unit 114, the addition unit 116, the loop filter unit 120, the intra prediction unit 124, the inter prediction unit 126, and the prediction control unit 128 function.
  • coding apparatus 100 includes division section 102, subtraction section 104, conversion section 106, quantization section 108, entropy coding section 110, inverse quantization section 112, inverse conversion section 114, addition section 116, and loop filter section 120. , And may be realized as one or more dedicated electronic circuits corresponding to the intra prediction unit 124, the inter prediction unit 126, and the prediction control unit 128.
  • the dividing unit 102 divides each picture included in the input moving image into a plurality of blocks, and outputs each block to the subtracting unit 104.
  • the division unit 102 first divides a picture into blocks of a fixed size (for example, 128 ⁇ 128).
  • This fixed size block may be referred to as a coding tree unit (CTU).
  • the dividing unit 102 divides each of fixed size blocks into blocks of variable size (for example, 64 ⁇ 64 or less) based on recursive quadtree and / or binary tree block division.
  • This variable sized block may be referred to as a coding unit (CU), a prediction unit (PU) or a transform unit (TU).
  • CUs, PUs, and TUs need not be distinguished, and some or all of the blocks in a picture may be processing units of CUs, PUs, and TUs.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of block division in the first embodiment.
  • solid lines represent block boundaries by quadtree block division
  • broken lines represent block boundaries by binary tree block division.
  • the block 10 is a square block (128 ⁇ 128 block) of 128 ⁇ 128 pixels.
  • the 128x128 block 10 is first divided into four square 64x64 blocks (quadtree block division).
  • the upper left 64x64 block is further vertically divided into two rectangular 32x64 blocks, and the left 32x64 block is further vertically divided into two rectangular 16x64 blocks (binary block division). As a result, the upper left 64x64 block is divided into two 16x64 blocks 11, 12 and a 32x64 block 13.
  • the upper right 64x64 block is divided horizontally into two rectangular 64x32 blocks 14 and 15 (binary block division).
  • the lower left 64x64 block is divided into four square 32x32 blocks (quadtree block division). Of the four 32x32 blocks, the upper left block and the lower right block are further divided.
  • the upper left 32x32 block is vertically divided into two rectangular 16x32 blocks, and the right 16x32 block is further horizontally split into two 16x16 blocks (binary block division).
  • the lower right 32x32 block is divided horizontally into two 32x16 blocks (binary block division).
  • the lower left 64x64 block is divided into a 16x32 block 16, two 16x16 blocks 17, 18, two 32x32 blocks 19, 20, and two 32x16 blocks 21, 22.
  • the lower right 64x64 block 23 is not divided.
  • the block 10 is divided into thirteen variable sized blocks 11 to 23 based on recursive quadtree and binary tree block division. Such division is sometimes called quad-tree plus binary tree (QTBT) division.
  • QTBT quad-tree plus binary tree
  • one block is divided into four or two blocks (quadtree or binary tree block division) in FIG. 2, the division is not limited to this.
  • one block may be divided into three blocks (tri-tree block division).
  • a partition including such a ternary tree block partition may be referred to as a multi type tree (MBT) partition.
  • MBT multi type tree
  • the subtracting unit 104 subtracts a prediction signal (prediction sample) from an original signal (original sample) in block units divided by the dividing unit 102. That is, the subtraction unit 104 calculates a prediction error (also referred to as a residual) of the encoding target block (hereinafter, referred to as a current block). Then, the subtracting unit 104 outputs the calculated prediction error to the converting unit 106.
  • the original signal is an input signal of the coding apparatus 100, and is a signal (for example, a luminance (luma) signal and two color difference (chroma) signals) representing an image of each picture constituting a moving image.
  • a signal representing an image may also be referred to as a sample.
  • Transform section 106 transforms the prediction error in the spatial domain into a transform coefficient in the frequency domain, and outputs the transform coefficient to quantization section 108.
  • the transform unit 106 performs, for example, discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) determined in advance on the prediction error in the spatial domain.
  • DCT discrete cosine transform
  • DST discrete sine transform
  • Transform section 106 adaptively selects a transform type from among a plurality of transform types, and transforms the prediction error into transform coefficients using a transform basis function corresponding to the selected transform type. You may Such transformation may be referred to as explicit multiple core transform (EMT) or adaptive multiple transform (AMT).
  • EMT explicit multiple core transform
  • AMT adaptive multiple transform
  • the plurality of transformation types include, for example, DCT-II, DCT-V, DCT-VIII, DST-I and DST-VII.
  • FIG. 3 is a table showing transform basis functions corresponding to each transform type. In FIG. 3, N indicates the number of input pixels. The choice of transform type from among these multiple transform types may depend, for example, on the type of prediction (intra-prediction and inter-prediction) or depending on the intra-prediction mode.
  • Information indicating whether to apply such EMT or AMT (for example, called an AMT flag) and information indicating the selected conversion type are signaled at CU level. Note that the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
  • the conversion unit 106 may re-convert the conversion coefficient (conversion result). Such reconversion may be referred to as adaptive secondary transform (AST) or non-separable secondary transform (NSST).
  • AST adaptive secondary transform
  • NSST non-separable secondary transform
  • the transform unit 106 performs retransformation for each sub block (for example, 4 ⁇ 4 sub blocks) included in the block of transform coefficients corresponding to the intra prediction error.
  • the information indicating whether to apply the NSST and the information on the transformation matrix used for the NSST are signaled at the CU level. Note that the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
  • Separable conversion is a method in which conversion is performed multiple times by separating in each direction as many as the number of dimensions of the input, and Non-Separable conversion is two or more when the input is multidimensional. This is a method of collectively converting the dimensions of 1 and 2 into one dimension.
  • Non-Separable conversion if the input is a 4 ⁇ 4 block, it is regarded as one array having 16 elements, and 16 ⁇ 16 conversion is performed on the array There is one that performs transformation processing with a matrix.
  • the quantization unit 108 quantizes the transform coefficient output from the transform unit 106. Specifically, the quantization unit 108 scans the transform coefficient of the current block in a predetermined scan order, and quantizes the transform coefficient based on the quantization parameter (QP) corresponding to the scanned transform coefficient. Then, the quantization unit 108 outputs the quantized transform coefficient of the current block (hereinafter, referred to as a quantization coefficient) to the entropy coding unit 110 and the inverse quantization unit 112.
  • QP quantization parameter
  • the predetermined order is an order for quantization / inverse quantization of transform coefficients.
  • the predetermined scan order is defined in ascending order (low frequency to high frequency) or descending order (high frequency to low frequency) of the frequency.
  • the quantization parameter is a parameter that defines a quantization step (quantization width). For example, if the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization step also increases. That is, as the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization error increases.
  • the entropy coding unit 110 generates a coded signal (coded bit stream) by subjecting the quantization coefficient input from the quantization unit 108 to variable-length coding. Specifically, for example, the entropy coding unit 110 binarizes the quantization coefficient and performs arithmetic coding on the binary signal.
  • the inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient which is the input from the quantization unit 108. Specifically, the inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of the current block in a predetermined scan order. Then, the inverse quantization unit 112 outputs the inverse quantized transform coefficient of the current block to the inverse transform unit 114.
  • the inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error by inversely transforming the transform coefficient which is the input from the inverse quantization unit 112. Specifically, the inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error of the current block by performing inverse transform corresponding to the transform by the transform unit 106 on the transform coefficient. Then, the inverse conversion unit 114 outputs the restored prediction error to the addition unit 116.
  • the restored prediction error does not match the prediction error calculated by the subtracting unit 104 because the information is lost due to quantization. That is, the restored prediction error includes the quantization error.
  • the addition unit 116 reconstructs the current block by adding the prediction error, which is the input from the inverse conversion unit 114, and the prediction sample, which is the input from the prediction control unit 128. Then, the addition unit 116 outputs the reconstructed block to the block memory 118 and the loop filter unit 120. Reconstruction blocks may also be referred to as local decoding blocks.
  • the block memory 118 is a storage unit for storing a block in an encoding target picture (hereinafter referred to as a current picture) which is a block referred to in intra prediction. Specifically, the block memory 118 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 116.
  • the loop filter unit 120 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 116, and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 122.
  • the loop filter is a filter (in-loop filter) used in the coding loop, and includes, for example, a deblocking filter (DF), a sample adaptive offset (SAO), an adaptive loop filter (ALF) and the like.
  • a least squares error filter is applied to remove coding distortion, for example, multiple 2x2 subblocks in the current block, based on local gradient direction and activity.
  • One filter selected from the filters is applied.
  • subblocks for example, 2x2 subblocks
  • a plurality of classes for example, 15 or 25 classes.
  • the direction value D of the gradient is derived, for example, by comparing gradients in a plurality of directions (for example, horizontal, vertical and two diagonal directions).
  • the gradient activation value A is derived, for example, by adding gradients in a plurality of directions and quantizing the addition result.
  • a filter for the subblock is determined among the plurality of filters.
  • FIGS. 4A to 4C are diagrams showing a plurality of examples of filter shapes used in ALF.
  • FIG. 4A shows a 5 ⁇ 5 diamond shaped filter
  • FIG. 4B shows a 7 ⁇ 7 diamond shaped filter
  • FIG. 4C shows a 9 ⁇ 9 diamond shaped filter.
  • Information indicating the shape of the filter is signaled at the picture level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating the shape of the filter does not have to be limited to the picture level, and may be another level (for example, sequence level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or CU level).
  • the on / off of the ALF is determined, for example, at the picture level or the CU level. For example, as to luminance, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the CU level, and as to color difference, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the picture level.
  • Information indicating on / off of ALF is signaled at picture level or CU level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating ALF on / off need not be limited to the picture level or CU level, and may be other levels (eg, sequence level, slice level, tile level or CTU level) Good.
  • the set of coefficients of the plurality of selectable filters (eg, up to 15 or 25 filters) is signaled at the picture level.
  • the signaling of the coefficient set need not be limited to the picture level, but may be other levels (eg, sequence level, slice level, tile level, CTU level, CU level or sub-block level).
  • the frame memory 122 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and may be referred to as a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 122 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 120.
  • the intra prediction unit 124 generates a prediction signal (intra prediction signal) by performing intra prediction (also referred to as in-screen prediction) of the current block with reference to a block in the current picture stored in the block memory 118. Specifically, the intra prediction unit 124 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to samples (for example, luminance value, color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. Output to the part 128.
  • intra prediction signal intra prediction signal
  • intra prediction also referred to as in-screen prediction
  • the intra prediction unit 124 performs intra prediction using one of a plurality of predefined intra prediction modes.
  • the plurality of intra prediction modes include one or more non-directional prediction modes and a plurality of directional prediction modes.
  • Non-directional prediction modes are described in, for example, H.264. It includes Planar prediction mode and DC prediction mode defined in H.265 / High-Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard (Non-Patent Document 1).
  • Planar prediction mode and DC prediction mode defined in H.265 / High-Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard (Non-Patent Document 1).
  • HEVC High-Efficiency Video Coding
  • the plurality of directionality prediction modes are, for example, H.264. It includes 33 directional prediction modes defined by the H.265 / HEVC standard. In addition to the 33 directions, the plurality of directionality prediction modes may further include 32 direction prediction modes (a total of 65 directionality prediction modes).
  • FIG. 5A is a diagram showing 67 intra prediction modes (2 non-directional prediction modes and 65 directional prediction modes) in intra prediction. Solid arrows indicate H. A broken line arrow represents the added 32 directions, which represents the 33 directions defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard.
  • a luminance block may be referred to in intra prediction of a chrominance block. That is, the chrominance component of the current block may be predicted based on the luminance component of the current block.
  • Such intra prediction may be referred to as cross-component linear model (CCLM) prediction.
  • the intra prediction mode (for example, referred to as a CCLM mode) of a chrominance block referencing such a luminance block may be added as one of the intra prediction modes of the chrominance block.
  • the intra prediction unit 124 may correct the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of the reference pixel in the horizontal / vertical directions. Intra prediction with such correction is sometimes called position dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC). Information indicating the presence or absence of application of PDPC (for example, called a PDPC flag) is signaled, for example, at CU level. Note that the signaling of this information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
  • the inter prediction unit 126 performs inter prediction (also referred to as inter-frame prediction) of a current block with reference to a reference picture that is a reference picture stored in the frame memory 122 and that is different from the current picture. Generate a prediction signal). Inter prediction is performed in units of a current block or sub blocks (for example, 4 ⁇ 4 blocks) in the current block. For example, the inter prediction unit 126 performs motion estimation on the current block or sub block in the reference picture. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) obtained by the motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 outputs the generated inter prediction signal to the prediction control unit 128.
  • inter prediction also referred to as inter-frame prediction
  • a motion vector predictor may be used to signal the motion vector. That is, the difference between the motion vector and the predicted motion vector may be signaled.
  • the inter prediction signal may be generated using not only the motion information of the current block obtained by the motion search but also the motion information of the adjacent block. Specifically, the inter prediction signal is generated in units of sub blocks in the current block by weighting and adding a prediction signal based on motion information obtained by motion search and a prediction signal based on motion information of an adjacent block. It may be done.
  • Such inter prediction (motion compensation) may be called OBMC (overlapped block motion compensation).
  • OBMC block size information indicating the size of sub-blocks for OBMC
  • OBMC flag information indicating whether or not to apply the OBMC mode
  • FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C are a flowchart and a conceptual diagram for explaining an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing.
  • a predicted image (Pred) by normal motion compensation is acquired using the motion vector (MV) assigned to the encoding target block.
  • the motion vector (MV_L) of the encoded left adjacent block is applied to the current block to obtain a predicted image (Pred_L), and the predicted image and Pred_L are weighted and superimposed. Perform the first correction of the image.
  • the motion vector (MV_U) of the encoded upper adjacent block is applied to the coding target block to obtain a predicted image (Pred_U), and the predicted image subjected to the first correction and the Pred_U are weighted.
  • a second correction of the predicted image is performed by adding and superposing, and this is made a final predicted image.
  • the right adjacent block and the lower adjacent block may be used to perform correction more than two steps. It is possible.
  • the area to be superimposed may not be the pixel area of the entire block, but only a partial area near the block boundary.
  • the processing target block may be a prediction block unit or a sub block unit obtained by further dividing the prediction block.
  • obmc_flag is a signal indicating whether to apply the OBMC process.
  • the encoding apparatus it is determined whether the encoding target block belongs to a complex area of motion, and if it belongs to a complex area of motion, the value 1 is set as obmc_flag. The encoding is performed by applying the OBMC processing, and when not belonging to the complex region of motion, the value 0 is set as the obmc_flag and the encoding is performed without applying the OBMC processing.
  • the decoding apparatus decodes the obmc_flag described in the stream, and switches whether to apply the OBMC process according to the value to perform decoding.
  • the motion information may be derived on the decoding device side without being signalized.
  • the merge mode defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard may be used.
  • motion information may be derived by performing motion search on the decoding device side. In this case, motion search is performed without using the pixel value of the current block.
  • the mode in which motion estimation is performed on the side of the decoding apparatus may be referred to as a pattern matched motion vector derivation (PMMVD) mode or a frame rate up-conversion (FRUC) mode.
  • PMMVD pattern matched motion vector derivation
  • FRUC frame rate up-conversion
  • FIG. 5D An example of the FRUC process is shown in FIG. 5D.
  • a plurality of candidate lists (which may be common to the merge list) each having a predicted motion vector are generated Be done.
  • the best candidate MV is selected from among the plurality of candidate MVs registered in the candidate list. For example, an evaluation value of each candidate included in the candidate list is calculated, and one candidate is selected based on the evaluation value.
  • a motion vector for the current block is derived based on the selected candidate motion vector.
  • the selected candidate motion vector (best candidate MV) is derived as it is as the motion vector for the current block.
  • a motion vector for the current block may be derived by performing pattern matching in a peripheral region of a position in the reference picture corresponding to the selected candidate motion vector. That is, the search is performed on the area around the best candidate MV by the same method, and if there is an MV for which the evaluation value is good, the best candidate MV is updated to the MV and the current block is updated. It may be used as the final MV. In addition, it is also possible to set it as the structure which does not implement the said process.
  • the evaluation value is calculated by calculating the difference value of the reconstructed image by pattern matching between the area in the reference picture corresponding to the motion vector and the predetermined area. Note that the evaluation value may be calculated using information other than the difference value.
  • first pattern matching or second pattern matching is used as pattern matching.
  • the first pattern matching and the second pattern matching may be referred to as bilateral matching and template matching, respectively.
  • pattern matching is performed between two blocks in two different reference pictures, which are along the motion trajectory of the current block. Therefore, in the first pattern matching, a region in another reference picture along the motion trajectory of the current block is used as the predetermined region for calculation of the evaluation value of the candidate described above.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along a motion trajectory.
  • First pattern matching among pairs of two blocks in two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1) which are two blocks along the motion trajectory of the current block (Cur block), Two motion vectors (MV0, MV1) are derived by searching for the most matching pair. Specifically, for the current block, a reconstructed image at a designated position in the first encoded reference picture (Ref 0) designated by the candidate MV, and a symmetric MV obtained by scaling the candidate MV at a display time interval.
  • the difference with the reconstructed image at the specified position in the second coded reference picture (Ref 1) specified in step is derived, and the evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value.
  • the candidate MV with the best evaluation value among the plurality of candidate MVs may be selected as the final MV.
  • motion vectors (MV0, MV1) pointing to two reference blocks are the temporal distance between the current picture (Cur Pic) and the two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1) It is proportional to (TD0, TD1).
  • the mirror symmetric bi-directional motion vector Is derived when the current picture is temporally located between two reference pictures, and the temporal distances from the current picture to the two reference pictures are equal, in the first pattern matching, the mirror symmetric bi-directional motion vector Is derived.
  • pattern matching is performed between a template in the current picture (a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture (eg, upper and / or left adjacent blocks)) and a block in the reference picture. Therefore, in the second pattern matching, a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture is used as the predetermined area for calculating the evaluation value of the candidate described above.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (template matching) between a template in a current picture and a block in a reference picture.
  • the current block (Cur Pic) is searched for in the reference picture (Ref 0) for a block that most closely matches a block adjacent to the current block (Cur block).
  • Motion vectors are derived.
  • the reconstructed image of the left adjacent region and / or the upper adjacent encoded region and the encoded reference picture (Ref 0) specified by the candidate MV are equivalent to each other.
  • the evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value, and the candidate MV having the best evaluation value among the plurality of candidate MVs is selected as the best candidate MV Good.
  • a FRUC flag Information indicating whether to apply such a FRUC mode (for example, called a FRUC flag) is signaled at the CU level.
  • a signal for example, called a FRUC mode flag
  • a method of pattern matching for example, first pattern matching or second pattern matching
  • the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or subblock level) .
  • This mode is sometimes referred to as a bi-directional optical flow (BIO) mode.
  • BIO bi-directional optical flow
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming uniform linear motion.
  • (v x , v y ) indicate velocity vectors
  • ⁇ 0 and ⁇ 1 indicate the time between the current picture (Cur Pic) and two reference pictures (Ref 0 and Ref 1 ), respectively.
  • (MVx 0 , MVy 0 ) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref 0
  • (MVx 1 , MVy 1 ) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref 1 .
  • the optical flow equation is: (i) the time derivative of the luminance value, (ii) the product of the horizontal velocity and the horizontal component of the spatial gradient of the reference image, and (iii) the vertical velocity and the spatial gradient of the reference image Indicates that the product of the vertical components of and the sum of is equal to zero.
  • a motion vector in units of blocks obtained from a merge list or the like is corrected in units of pixels.
  • the motion vector may be derived on the decoding device side by a method different from the derivation of the motion vector based on a model assuming uniform linear motion.
  • motion vectors may be derived on a subblock basis based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
  • This mode is sometimes referred to as affine motion compensation prediction mode.
  • FIG. 9A is a diagram for describing derivation of a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
  • the current block includes sixteen 4 ⁇ 4 subblocks.
  • the motion vector v 0 of the upper left corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent block
  • the motion vector v 1 of the upper right corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent subblock Be done.
  • the motion vector (v x , v y ) of each sub block in the current block is derived according to the following equation (2).
  • x and y indicate the horizontal position and the vertical position of the sub block, respectively, and w indicates a predetermined weighting factor.
  • the derivation method of the motion vector of the upper left and upper right control points may include several different modes.
  • Information indicating such an affine motion compensation prediction mode (for example, called an affine flag) is signaled at the CU level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating this affine motion compensation prediction mode need not be limited to the CU level, and other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or subblock level) ) May be.
  • the prediction control unit 128 selects one of the intra prediction signal and the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal as a prediction signal to the subtraction unit 104 and the addition unit 116.
  • FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing an overview of motion vector derivation processing in the merge mode.
  • a predicted MV list in which candidates for predicted MV are registered is generated.
  • the prediction MV candidate the position of the coding target block in the coded reference picture, which is the MV of the plurality of coded blocks located in the spatial periphery of the coding target block, is projected
  • Temporally adjacent prediction MV which is an MV possessed by a nearby block
  • joint prediction MV which is an MV generated by combining spatially adjacent prediction MV and MVs of temporally adjacent prediction MV, and zero prediction MV whose value is MV, etc.
  • one prediction MV is selected from among the plurality of prediction MVs registered in the prediction MV list, and it is determined as the MV of the current block.
  • merge_idx which is a signal indicating which prediction MV has been selected, is described in the stream and encoded.
  • the prediction MVs registered in the prediction MV list described in FIG. 9B are an example, and the number is different from the number in the drawing, or the configuration does not include some types of the prediction MV in the drawing, It may have a configuration in which prediction MVs other than the type of prediction MV in the drawing are added.
  • the final MV may be determined by performing the DMVR process described later using the MV of the coding target block derived in the merge mode.
  • FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for describing an overview of DMVR processing.
  • a first reference picture which is a processed picture in the L0 direction and a second reference picture which is a processed picture in the L1 direction To generate a template by averaging each reference pixel.
  • the regions around candidate MVs of the first reference picture and the second reference picture are respectively searched, and the MV with the lowest cost is determined as the final MV.
  • the cost value is calculated using the difference value between each pixel value of the template and each pixel value of the search area, the MV value, and the like.
  • the outline of the process described here is basically common to the encoding apparatus and the decoding apparatus.
  • FIG. 9D is a diagram for describing an outline of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing.
  • an MV for obtaining a reference image corresponding to a current block to be coded is derived from a reference picture which is a coded picture.
  • a predicted image for a block to be encoded is generated.
  • the shape of the peripheral reference area in FIG. 9D is an example, and other shapes may be used.
  • a predicted image is generated from a plurality of reference pictures, and is similar to the reference image acquired from each reference picture. After performing luminance correction processing by a method, a predicted image is generated.
  • lic_flag is a signal indicating whether to apply the LIC process.
  • the encoding apparatus it is determined whether or not the encoding target block belongs to the area in which the luminance change occurs, and when it belongs to the area in which the luminance change occurs, as lic_flag A value of 1 is set and encoding is performed by applying LIC processing, and when not belonging to an area where a luminance change occurs, a value of 0 is set as lic_flag and encoding is performed without applying the LIC processing.
  • the decoding apparatus decodes lic_flag described in the stream to switch whether to apply the LIC processing according to the value and performs decoding.
  • determining whether to apply the LIC process for example, there is also a method of determining according to whether or not the LIC process is applied to the peripheral block.
  • a method of determining according to whether or not the LIC process is applied to the peripheral block For example, when the encoding target block is in merge mode, whether or not the surrounding encoded blocks selected in the derivation of the MV in merge mode processing are encoded by applying LIC processing According to the result, whether to apply the LIC process is switched to perform encoding. In the case of this example, the processing in the decoding is completely the same.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of decoding apparatus 200 according to Embodiment 1.
  • the decoding device 200 is a moving image / image decoding device that decodes a moving image / image in units of blocks.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 includes an entropy decoding unit 202, an inverse quantization unit 204, an inverse conversion unit 206, an addition unit 208, a block memory 210, a loop filter unit 212, and a frame memory 214. , An intra prediction unit 216, an inter prediction unit 218, and a prediction control unit 220.
  • the decoding device 200 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory. In this case, when the processor executes the software program stored in the memory, the processor determines whether the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse conversion unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, the intra prediction unit 216 functions as an inter prediction unit 218 and a prediction control unit 220.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 is a dedicated unit corresponding to the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse conversion unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, the intra prediction unit 216, the inter prediction unit 218, and the prediction control unit 220. And one or more electronic circuits.
  • the entropy decoding unit 202 entropy decodes the coded bit stream. Specifically, the entropy decoding unit 202 performs arithmetic decoding, for example, from a coded bit stream to a binary signal. Then, the entropy decoding unit 202 debinarizes the binary signal. Thereby, the entropy decoding unit 202 outputs the quantization coefficient to the dequantization unit 204 in block units.
  • the inverse quantization unit 204 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of the block to be decoded (hereinafter referred to as a current block), which is an input from the entropy decoding unit 202. Specifically, the dequantization part 204 dequantizes the said quantization coefficient about each of the quantization coefficient of a current block based on the quantization parameter corresponding to the said quantization coefficient. Then, the dequantization unit 204 outputs the dequantized quantization coefficient (that is, transform coefficient) of the current block to the inverse transformation unit 206.
  • a current block which is an input from the entropy decoding unit 202.
  • the dequantization part 204 dequantizes the said quantization coefficient about each of the quantization coefficient of a current block based on the quantization parameter corresponding to the said quantization coefficient. Then, the dequantization unit 204 outputs the dequantized quantization coefficient (that is, transform coefficient) of the current block to the inverse transformation unit 206.
  • the inverse transform unit 206 restores the prediction error by inversely transforming the transform coefficient that is the input from the inverse quantization unit 204.
  • the inverse transform unit 206 determines the current block based on the deciphered transformation type information. Inverse transform coefficients of
  • the inverse transform unit 206 applies inverse retransformation to the transform coefficients.
  • the addition unit 208 adds the prediction error, which is the input from the inverse conversion unit 206, and the prediction sample, which is the input from the prediction control unit 220, to reconstruct the current block. Then, the adding unit 208 outputs the reconstructed block to the block memory 210 and the loop filter unit 212.
  • the block memory 210 is a storage unit for storing a block within a picture to be decoded (hereinafter referred to as a current picture) which is a block referred to in intra prediction. Specifically, the block memory 210 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 208.
  • the loop filter unit 212 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 208, and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 214 and a display device or the like.
  • one filter is selected from the plurality of filters based on the local gradient direction and activity, The selected filter is applied to the reconstruction block.
  • the frame memory 214 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and may be referred to as a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 214 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 212.
  • the intra prediction unit 216 refers to a block in the current picture stored in the block memory 210 to perform intra prediction based on the intra prediction mode read from the coded bit stream, thereby generating a prediction signal (intra prediction Signal). Specifically, the intra prediction unit 216 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to samples (for example, luminance value, color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. Output to unit 220.
  • the intra prediction unit 216 may predict the chrominance component of the current block based on the luminance component of the current block. .
  • the intra prediction unit 216 corrects the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of reference pixels in the horizontal / vertical directions.
  • the inter prediction unit 218 predicts the current block with reference to the reference picture stored in the frame memory 214.
  • the prediction is performed in units of the current block or subblocks (for example, 4 ⁇ 4 blocks) in the current block.
  • the inter prediction unit 218 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) read from the coded bit stream, and generates an inter prediction signal. It is output to the prediction control unit 220.
  • the inter prediction unit 218 determines not only the motion information of the current block obtained by the motion search but also the motion information of the adjacent block. Use to generate an inter prediction signal.
  • the inter prediction unit 218 is configured to follow the method of pattern matching deciphered from the coded stream (bilateral matching or template matching). Motion information is derived by performing motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 218 performs motion compensation using the derived motion information.
  • the inter prediction unit 218 derives a motion vector based on a model assuming uniform linear motion. Also, in the case where the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the affine motion compensation prediction mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 performs motion vectors in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. Derive
  • the prediction control unit 220 selects one of the intra prediction signal and the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal to the addition unit 208 as a prediction signal.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first aspect of the deblocking filter processing by the loop filter unit 120 included in the encoding device 100. The process shown in FIG. 11 is performed for each block boundary of two adjacent blocks. Although the operation of the loop filter unit 120 included in the encoding device 100 will be mainly described below, the operation of the loop filter unit 212 included in the decoding device 200 is also the same.
  • the loop filter unit 120 calculates a value called Bs using information of blocks located on both sides of a target boundary which is a target block boundary (S201). Next, in accordance with the value of Bs, the loop filter unit 120 determines whether to perform deblocking filter processing on the target boundary (S202 and S203).
  • the loop filter unit 120 performs deblocking filter processing on both the luminance and the color difference (S204 and S205).
  • Bs 1 (YES in S202 and NO in S203)
  • the loop filter unit 120 performs deblocking filter processing on luminance (S206), and performs deblocking filter processing on chrominance. Not performed.
  • Bs 0 (NO in S202)
  • the loop filter unit 120 does not perform the deblocking filter process on any of the luminance and the color difference.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs.
  • the Bs calculation of deblocking filter processing in HEVC (1) at least one block of two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary is an intra prediction block, (2) two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary At least one of the blocks includes a dominant DCT coefficient, (3) the difference in motion vectors of two adjacent blocks across the boundary is equal to or greater than a threshold, (4) motion in two adjacent blocks across the boundary Four conditions are used: the number of vectors (MV) or the reference image is different.
  • the condition (5) that at least one of the two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary is subjected to the LIC process is added.
  • the Bs value in the case where (5) LIC processing is performed on at least one of two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary may be either non-zero or one or two.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
  • the inter prediction unit 126 derives a motion vector for obtaining a reference image corresponding to a current block to be coded from a reference picture which is a coded picture.
  • the inter prediction unit 126 generates a predicted image for the coding target block by performing luminance correction processing on the reference image in the reference picture specified by the motion vector using the luminance correction parameter.
  • the luminance pixel value in the reference image is p2
  • the luminance pixel value of the predicted image after the luminance correction processing is p3.
  • the shape of the peripheral reference area in FIG. 9D is an example, and any other shape may be used. Also, a part of the peripheral reference area shown in FIG. 9D may be used. Further, the peripheral reference area is not limited to the area adjacent to the encoding target block, and may be an area not adjacent to the encoding target block. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9D, the peripheral reference area in the reference picture is an area designated by the motion vector of the encoding target picture from the peripheral reference area in the encoding target picture, but other motion vectors It may be a designated area. For example, the other motion vector may be a motion vector of a peripheral reference area in the current picture.
  • the loop filter unit 212 included in the decoding device 200 performs the same process as the above-described deblocking filtering process in the loop filter unit 120 included in the coding device 100.
  • the condition of (5) is performing LIC processing to at least one of two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary, but in the second aspect, the positional relationship of the blocks is considered. ing.
  • the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs ⁇ 0 when the LIC process is performed on the adjacent block among the two blocks (the current block and the adjacent block) sandwiching the target boundary. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs ⁇ 0 when LIC processing is performed on the left block (adjacent block) among the blocks positioned on the left and right. Further, as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
  • the Bs value in the case where the LIC processing is performed on the upper (left) block among the blocks located at the top and bottom (left and right) in (5A) may be either non-zero or one or two.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
  • the loop filter unit 212 included in the decoding device 200 performs the same process as the above-described deblocking filtering process in the loop filter unit 120 included in the coding device 100.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 perform the process shown in FIG.
  • the coding apparatus 100 determines whether to apply the luminance correction process (for example, the LIC process) of the predicted image to the determination block which is at least one of the target block and the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It determines (S231).
  • the luminance correction process for example, the LIC process
  • the encoding apparatus 100 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S232). On the other hand, when the luminance correction process is not applied to the determination block (NO in S231), the encoding apparatus 100 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S233).
  • the determination block is the target block and the adjacent block in the first aspect. That is, the encoding apparatus 100 applies the deblocking filtering process to the boundary when the luminance correction process is applied to one or both of the target block and the adjacent block. The encoding apparatus 100 does not apply the deblocking filtering process to the boundary when the luminance correction process is not applied to any of the target block and the adjacent block.
  • the determination block is an adjacent block. That is, the encoding apparatus 100 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary when applying the luminance correction process to the adjacent block regardless of whether the luminance correction process is applied to the target block. The encoding apparatus 100 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary when the luminance correction process is not applied to the adjacent block regardless of whether the luminance correction process is applied to the target block.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than 0. Do.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 sets Bs to 0, thereby not applying the deblocking filter process to the boundary.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 performs luminance correction processing (for example, LIC) of a predicted image on a determination block that is at least one of a target block and an adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It is determined whether the process is applied (S231).
  • luminance correction processing for example, LIC
  • the decoding apparatus 200 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S232). On the other hand, when the luminance correction process is not applied to the determination block (NO in S231), the decoding apparatus 200 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S233).
  • the determination block is the target block and the adjacent block in the first aspect. That is, when applying the luminance correction process to one or both of the target block and the adjacent block, the decoding apparatus 200 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary. When the luminance correction process is not applied to any of the target block and the adjacent block, the decoding apparatus 200 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary.
  • the determination block is an adjacent block. That is, the decoding apparatus 200 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary when applying the luminance correction process to the adjacent block regardless of whether the luminance correction process is applied to the target block. The decoding apparatus 200 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary when the luminance correction process is not applied to the adjacent block regardless of whether the luminance correction process is applied to the target block.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 when the luminance correction process is applied to the determination block, the decoding apparatus 200 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than 0. .
  • the decoding apparatus 200 sets Bs to 0, thereby not applying the deblocking filter process to the boundary.
  • encoding apparatus 100 divides image into a plurality of blocks, and intra prediction unit 124 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference picture included in the image.
  • An inter prediction unit 126 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; a loop filter unit 120 that applies a filter to the block included in the image;
  • a conversion unit 106 that converts a prediction error between the prediction signal generated by the intra prediction unit 124 or the inter prediction unit 126 and the original signal to generate a conversion coefficient, and quantizes the conversion coefficient to generate a quantization coefficient Quantization unit 108, and entropy that generates a coded bit stream by variable-length coding the quantization coefficient.
  • the loop filter unit 120 determines whether to apply the luminance correction process (for example, the LIC process) of the predicted image to the determination block which is at least one of the target block and the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It determines (S231). When the luminance correction process is applied to the determination block (YES in S231), the loop filter unit 120 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S232). On the other hand, when the luminance correction process is not applied to the determination block (NO in S231), the loop filter unit 120 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S233).
  • the luminance correction process for example, the LIC process
  • the decoding apparatus 200 decodes a coded bit stream and outputs a quantization coefficient (entropy decoding unit 202), and inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient to output a transform coefficient.
  • An inter prediction unit 218 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; and a loop filter unit 212 that applies a filter to the block included in the image Prepare.
  • the loop filter unit 212 determines whether to apply the luminance correction process (for example, the LIC process) of the predicted image to the determination block which is at least one of the target block and the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It determines (S231). When the luminance correction process is applied to the determination block (YES in S231), the loop filter unit 212 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S232). On the other hand, when the luminance correction process is not applied to the determination block (NO in S231), the loop filter unit 212 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S233).
  • the luminance correction process for example, the LIC process
  • the contents of the first aspect and the Bs determination process (S201) are different.
  • the condition (5) is performing LIC processing on at least one of two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary, but in the third aspect, in addition to that, LIC processing Even the content of the brightness correction parameter is considered.
  • the loop filter unit 120 performs LIC processing on at least one of the adjacent block and the target block which are two blocks sandwiching the target boundary, and the luminance of the LIC processing in the adjacent block and the target block If the correction parameters are different, Bs ⁇ 0 is set. For example, when the loop filter unit 120 performs LIC processing on at least one of the upper and lower blocks and the luminance correction parameter of the upper block is different from the luminance correction parameter of the lower block. , Set Bs ⁇ 0. In addition, when the loop filter unit 120 performs LIC processing on at least one of the blocks positioned on the left and right, and the luminance correction parameter of the left block differs from the luminance correction parameter of the right block. , Set Bs ⁇ 0. Here, when the LIC process is performed on one block across the block boundary and the LIC process is not performed on the other block, it is determined that the brightness correction parameters of the LIC process are different.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case. It should be noted that (5B) Bs value is 0 when at least one of the two blocks adjacent across the boundary is performing LIC processing and the luminance correction parameters of the blocks located vertically (left and right) are different. Otherwise, it may be one or two.
  • the luminance correction parameters are, for example, the coefficients A and B described above.
  • the difference between the two brightness correction parameters may mean that the difference between the two brightness correction parameters is larger than a predetermined threshold value.
  • the loop filter unit 120 calculates the difference between the coefficient A included in the two brightness correction parameters and the difference between the coefficients B, and when the calculated sum of the two differences is larger than the threshold value, the two brightness correction parameters Is determined to be different.
  • the loop filter unit 120 may perform weighted addition of two differences instead of the sum of the two differences, and compare the obtained value with a threshold.
  • the loop filter unit 120 may compare each of the two differences with a threshold, and determine that the two brightness correction parameters are different if at least one is greater than the threshold.
  • the threshold value to be compared with the two differences may be the same or different.
  • the loop filter unit 120 may use a method other than the above.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
  • the loop filter unit 212 included in the decoding device 200 performs the same process as the above-described deblocking filtering process in the loop filter unit 120 included in the coding device 100.
  • the loop filter unit 120 may switch whether to perform the above processing in units of slices or not.
  • the loop filter unit 120 may switch whether to perform the above processing in tile units or not.
  • the loop filter unit 120 may switch whether to perform the above processing in CTU units or not.
  • the loop filter unit 120 may switch whether or not to perform the above process in CU units.
  • the loop filter unit 120 may switch whether to perform the above process or not according to the frame type (P frame, B frame, etc.) of the frame to be processed.
  • the LIC luminance correction peripheral reference area is an example of the luminance pixel value of the encoded adjacent peripheral reference area on the left and upper sides of the block.
  • the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 does not use the luminance pixel value of the left adjacent encoded peripheral reference region as the LIC luminance correction peripheral reference region, but uses the luminance pixel value of the upper adjacent encoded peripheral reference region. Good.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 may change the peripheral reference area for LIC luminance correction according to the condition.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 may use a block with a small motion vector difference as a peripheral reference area for LIC luminance correction.
  • the possible value of the Bs value is not limited to this example, and other values may be adopted.
  • three or more values may be used as the Bs value.
  • the loop filter unit 120 may set three or more values as the Bs value.
  • the loop filter unit 120 determines whether LIC processing is used for each of the two blocks by referring to a LIC flag indicating whether or not LIC processing is used for each block. It may be done without using the LIC flag. For example, if the LIC process is used for the peripheral block, the LIC process is used for the target block, and if the LIC process is not used for the peripheral block, the LIC process is not used for the target block. In the case where it is determined, the loop filter unit 120 may determine whether LIC processing is used for the target block using the LIC usage status of the peripheral block.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 may determine whether LIC processing is applied or not. Depending on the level, the filter strength of the deblocking filtering may be changed. For example, when the LIC process is applied, the encoding apparatus 100 may increase the filter strength of the deblocking filter process as compared to the case where the LIC process is not applied.
  • the coding apparatus 100 may extend the deblocking filtering process not only to block boundaries but also to subblock boundaries.
  • a block is, for example, a processing unit (unit block) of orthogonal transformation
  • a sub-block is a processing unit (unit block) of prediction processing.
  • the third embodiment is not limited to the case where the luminance correction parameters are the same, but is not limited to the case where the luminance correction parameters in both blocks sandwiching the target boundary are exactly the same value, and the difference value between the parameters of both blocks is It may be the case where it is less than a predetermined value.
  • the Bs calculation processes exemplified in the first to third aspects can be appropriately combined or changed. That is, the encoding apparatus 100 may determine the parameter regarding the presence or absence of the application of the deblocking filter processing in the boundary based on the luminance correction parameter and / or the application presence or absence of the LIC processing in the two blocks sandwiching the boundary.
  • the present disclosure is not limited to the exemplified conditions or determination order of the calculation process.
  • coding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 perform the process shown in FIG.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 includes a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing (for example, LIC processing) of a predicted image for a target block, and a second luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing for an adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It is determined whether or not the difference between the two and the above is greater than a predetermined threshold (S251).
  • a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing for example, LIC processing
  • a second luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing for an adjacent block adjacent to the target block It is determined whether or not the difference between the two and the above is greater than a predetermined threshold (S251).
  • the encoding apparatus 100 applies deblocking filtering to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S252). On the other hand, when the difference is smaller than the threshold (NO in S252), the encoding apparatus 100 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S253).
  • the encoding apparatus 100 performs the deblocking filter process when the difference between the luminance correction parameter of the target block and the luminance correction parameter of the adjacent block is larger than the threshold.
  • block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved.
  • the coding apparatus 100 does not perform deblocking filter processing when the difference is smaller than the threshold. By this means, encoding apparatus 100 can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
  • the deblocking filter process is performed on the boundary. Apply.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 applies deblocking filtering to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than zero. If the difference is smaller than the threshold, the encoding apparatus 100 does not apply deblocking filtering to the boundary by setting Bs to 0.
  • the target block and the adjacent block are unit blocks of prediction processing.
  • the decoding device 200 performs the first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing (for example, LIC processing) of the predicted image for the target block and the second luminance correction used for luminance correction processing for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It is determined whether the difference from the parameter is larger than a predetermined threshold (S251).
  • a predetermined threshold for example, LIC processing
  • the decoding apparatus 200 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S252). On the other hand, when the difference is smaller than the threshold (NO in S251), the decoding device 200 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S253).
  • the decoding apparatus 200 performs the deblocking filter process when the difference between the luminance correction parameter of the target block and the luminance correction parameter of the adjacent block is larger than the threshold. As a result, block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved.
  • the decoding device 200 does not perform the deblocking filter process when the difference is smaller than the threshold. Accordingly, the decoding apparatus 200 can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 applies the luminance correction process to one of the target block and the adjacent block and does not apply the luminance correction process to the other of the target block and the adjacent block, the deblocking filter process is performed on the boundary.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
  • the decoding apparatus 200 when the difference is larger than a threshold, the decoding apparatus 200 applies deblocking filtering to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than zero. If the difference is smaller than the threshold, the decoding apparatus 200 does not apply deblocking filtering to the boundary by setting Bs to 0.
  • the target block and the adjacent block are unit blocks of prediction processing.
  • encoding apparatus 100 divides image into a plurality of blocks, and intra prediction unit 124 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference picture included in the image.
  • An inter prediction unit 126 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; a loop filter unit 120 that applies a filter to the block included in the image;
  • a conversion unit 106 that converts a prediction error between the prediction signal generated by the intra prediction unit 124 or the inter prediction unit 126 and the original signal to generate a conversion coefficient, and quantizes the conversion coefficient to generate a quantization coefficient Quantization unit 108, and entropy that generates a coded bit stream by variable-length coding the quantization coefficient.
  • the loop filter unit 120 uses the first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing (for example, LIC processing) of the predicted image for the target block, and the second luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It is determined whether or not the difference between the two and the above is greater than a predetermined threshold (S251). When the difference is larger than a predetermined threshold (YES in S251), the loop filter unit 120 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S252). On the other hand, when the difference is smaller than the threshold (NO in S251), the loop filter unit 120 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S253).
  • a predetermined threshold YES in S251
  • the decoding apparatus 200 decodes a coded bit stream and outputs a quantization coefficient (entropy decoding unit 202), and inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient to output a transform coefficient.
  • An inter prediction unit 218 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; and a loop filter unit 212 that applies a filter to the block included in the image Prepare.
  • the loop filter unit 212 performs a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing (for example, LIC processing) of a predicted image for a target block, and a second luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing for an adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It is determined whether or not the difference between the two and the above is greater than a predetermined threshold (S251). When the difference is larger than a predetermined threshold (YES in S251), the loop filter unit 212 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S252). On the other hand, when the difference is smaller than the threshold (NO in S251), the loop filter unit 212 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S253).
  • a predetermined threshold for example, LIC processing
  • FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of the coding apparatus 100 according to Embodiment 1.
  • the coding apparatus 100 includes a circuit 160 and a memory 162.
  • the components of the coding apparatus 100 shown in FIG. 1 are implemented by the circuit 160 and the memory 162 shown in FIG.
  • the circuit 160 is a circuit that performs information processing and can access the memory 162.
  • the circuit 160 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that encodes a moving image.
  • the circuit 160 may be a processor such as a CPU.
  • the circuit 160 may also be an assembly of a plurality of electronic circuits.
  • the circuit 160 may play a role of a plurality of components excluding the component for storing information among the plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 and the like.
  • the memory 162 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 160 to encode moving pictures is stored.
  • the memory 162 may be an electronic circuit or may be connected to the circuit 160.
  • the memory 162 may also be included in the circuit 160.
  • the memory 162 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits.
  • the memory 162 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium.
  • the memory 162 may be a non-volatile memory or a volatile memory.
  • the moving image to be encoded may be stored in the memory 162, or a bit string corresponding to the encoded moving image may be stored.
  • the memory 162 may also store a program for the circuit 160 to encode a moving image.
  • the memory 162 may play a role of a component for storing information among the plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 and the like. Specifically, the memory 162 may play the role of the block memory 118 and the frame memory 122 shown in FIG. More specifically, the memory 162 may store reconstructed blocks, reconstructed pictures, and the like.
  • all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like may not be mounted, or all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be performed by another device. Then, in the encoding apparatus 100, part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like is implemented, and part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, whereby motion compensation is efficiently performed. It will be.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of the decoding device 200 according to Embodiment 1.
  • the decoding device 200 includes a circuit 260 and a memory 262.
  • the plurality of components of the decoding device 200 shown in FIG. 10 are implemented by the circuit 260 and the memory 262 shown in FIG.
  • the circuit 260 is a circuit that performs information processing and can access the memory 262.
  • the circuit 260 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that decodes a moving image.
  • the circuit 260 may be a processor such as a CPU.
  • the circuit 260 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits.
  • the circuit 260 may play the role of a plurality of components excluding the component for storing information among the plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. 10 and the like.
  • the memory 262 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 260 to decode a moving image is stored.
  • the memory 262 may be an electronic circuit or may be connected to the circuit 260. Also, the memory 262 may be included in the circuit 260. Further, the memory 262 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits. Also, the memory 262 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium.
  • the memory 262 may be either a non-volatile memory or a volatile memory.
  • a bit string corresponding to a coded moving image may be stored, or a moving image corresponding to a decoded bit string may be stored.
  • the memory 262 may store a program for the circuit 260 to decode a moving image.
  • the memory 262 may play the role of a component for storing information among the plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. 10 and the like. Specifically, the memory 262 may play the role of the block memory 210 and the frame memory 214 shown in FIG. More specifically, the memory 262 may store reconstructed blocks, reconstructed pictures, and the like.
  • all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like may not be mounted, or all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be performed by another device. Then, in the decoding device 200, part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like is implemented, and part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, whereby motion compensation is efficiently performed. .
  • coding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 in the present embodiment may be used as an image coding apparatus and an image decoding apparatus, respectively, and may be used as a moving image coding apparatus and a moving image decoding apparatus. Good.
  • the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 may each be used as a loop filter device.
  • encoding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 may correspond to only loop filter section 120 and loop filter section 212, respectively. Then, other components such as the conversion unit 106 and the inverse conversion unit 206 may be included in other devices.
  • each component may be configured by dedicated hardware or implemented by executing a software program suitable for each component.
  • Each component may be realized by a program execution unit such as a CPU or a processor reading and executing a software program recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or a semiconductor memory.
  • each of the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 includes a processing circuit (Processing Circuitry) and a storage device (Storage) electrically connected to the processing circuit and accessible to the processing circuit. You may have.
  • processing circuitry may correspond to circuitry 160 or 260 and storage may correspond to memory 162 or 262.
  • the processing circuit includes at least one of dedicated hardware and a program execution unit, and executes processing using a storage device.
  • the storage device stores a software program executed by the program execution unit.
  • software for realizing the encoding apparatus 100 or the decoding apparatus 200 of the present embodiment is a program as follows.
  • each component may be a circuit as described above. These circuits may constitute one circuit as a whole or may be separate circuits. Each component may be realized by a general purpose processor or a dedicated processor.
  • another component may execute the processing that a particular component performs. Further, the order of executing the processing may be changed, or a plurality of processing may be executed in parallel. Further, the coding and decoding apparatus may include the coding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200.
  • the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 was demonstrated based on embodiment, the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 is not limited to this embodiment.
  • the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may be configured by combining various modifications in the present embodiment that may occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit of the present disclosure, or by combining components in different embodiments. It may be included within the scope of the aspect of.
  • This aspect may be practiced in combination with at least some of the other aspects in the present disclosure.
  • part of the processing described in the flowchart of this aspect part of the configuration of the apparatus, part of the syntax, and the like may be implemented in combination with other aspects.
  • each of the functional blocks can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, and the like. Further, the processing by each of the functional blocks is usually realized by a program execution unit such as a processor reading and executing software (program) recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM.
  • the software may be distributed by downloading or the like, or may be distributed by being recorded in a recording medium such as a semiconductor memory.
  • each embodiment may be realized by centralized processing using a single device (system), or may be realized by distributed processing using a plurality of devices. Good.
  • the processor that executes the program may be singular or plural. That is, centralized processing may be performed, or distributed processing may be performed.
  • the system is characterized by having an image coding apparatus using an image coding method, an image decoding apparatus using an image decoding method, and an image coding / decoding apparatus provided with both.
  • Other configurations in the system can be suitably modified as the case may be.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a content supply system ex100 for realizing content distribution service.
  • the area for providing communication service is divided into desired sizes, and base stations ex106, ex107, ex108, ex109 and ex110, which are fixed wireless stations, are installed in each cell.
  • each device such as a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, and a smartphone ex115 via the Internet service provider ex102 or the communication network ex104 and the base stations ex106 to ex110 on the Internet ex101 Is connected.
  • the content supply system ex100 may connect any of the above-described elements in combination.
  • the respective devices may be connected to each other directly or indirectly via a telephone network, near-field radio, etc., not via the base stations ex106 to ex110 which are fixed wireless stations.
  • the streaming server ex103 is connected to each device such as the computer ex111, the game machine ex112, the camera ex113, the home appliance ex114, and the smartphone ex115 via the Internet ex101 or the like.
  • the streaming server ex103 is connected to a terminal or the like in a hotspot in the aircraft ex117 via the satellite ex116.
  • a radio access point or a hotspot may be used instead of base stations ex106 to ex110.
  • the streaming server ex103 may be directly connected to the communication network ex104 without the internet ex101 or the internet service provider ex102, or may be directly connected with the airplane ex117 without the satellite ex116.
  • the camera ex113 is a device capable of shooting a still image such as a digital camera and shooting a moving image.
  • the smartphone ex115 is a smartphone, a mobile phone, a PHS (Personal Handyphone System), or the like compatible with a mobile communication system generally called 2G, 3G, 3.9G, 4G, and 5G in the future.
  • the home appliance ex118 is a refrigerator or a device included in a home fuel cell cogeneration system.
  • a terminal having a photographing function when a terminal having a photographing function is connected to the streaming server ex103 through the base station ex106 or the like, live distribution and the like become possible.
  • a terminal (a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, a smartphone ex115, a terminal in an airplane ex117, etc.) transmits the still image or moving image content captured by the user using the terminal.
  • the encoding process described in each embodiment is performed, and video data obtained by the encoding and sound data obtained by encoding a sound corresponding to the video are multiplexed, and the obtained data is transmitted to the streaming server ex103. That is, each terminal functions as an image coding apparatus according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
  • the streaming server ex 103 streams the content data transmitted to the requested client.
  • the client is a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, a smartphone ex115, a terminal in the airplane ex117, or the like capable of decoding the above-described encoded data.
  • Each device that receives the distributed data decrypts and reproduces the received data. That is, each device functions as an image decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
  • the streaming server ex103 may be a plurality of servers or a plurality of computers, and may process, record, or distribute data in a distributed manner.
  • the streaming server ex103 may be realized by a CDN (Contents Delivery Network), and content delivery may be realized by a network connecting a large number of edge servers distributed around the world and the edge servers.
  • CDN Content Delivery Network
  • content delivery may be realized by a network connecting a large number of edge servers distributed around the world and the edge servers.
  • physically close edge servers are dynamically assigned according to clients. The delay can be reduced by caching and distributing the content to the edge server.
  • processing is distributed among multiple edge servers, or the distribution subject is switched to another edge server, or a portion of the network where a failure has occurred. Since the delivery can be continued bypassing, high-speed and stable delivery can be realized.
  • each terminal may perform encoding processing of captured data, or may perform processing on the server side, or may share processing with each other.
  • a processing loop is performed twice.
  • the first loop the complexity or code amount of the image in frame or scene units is detected.
  • the second loop processing is performed to maintain the image quality and improve the coding efficiency.
  • the terminal performs a first encoding process
  • the server receiving the content performs a second encoding process, thereby improving the quality and efficiency of the content while reducing the processing load on each terminal. it can.
  • the first encoded data made by the terminal can also be received and reproduced by another terminal, enabling more flexible real time delivery Become.
  • the camera ex 113 or the like extracts a feature amount from an image, compresses data relating to the feature amount as metadata, and transmits the data to the server.
  • the server performs compression according to the meaning of the image, for example, determining the importance of the object from the feature amount and switching the quantization accuracy.
  • Feature amount data is particularly effective in improving the accuracy and efficiency of motion vector prediction at the time of second compression in the server.
  • the terminal may perform simple coding such as VLC (variable length coding) and the server may perform coding with a large processing load such as CABAC (context adaptive binary arithmetic coding method).
  • a plurality of video data in which substantially the same scenes are shot by a plurality of terminals.
  • a unit of GOP Group of Picture
  • a unit of picture or a tile into which a picture is divided, using a plurality of terminals for which photographing was performed and other terminals and servers which are not photographing as necessary.
  • the encoding process is allocated in units, etc., and distributed processing is performed. This reduces delay and can realize more real time performance.
  • the server may manage and / or instruct the video data captured by each terminal to be mutually referred to.
  • the server may receive the encoded data from each terminal and change the reference relationship among a plurality of data, or may correct or replace the picture itself and re-encode it. This makes it possible to generate streams with enhanced quality and efficiency of each piece of data.
  • the server may deliver the video data after performing transcoding for changing the coding method of the video data.
  • the server may convert the encoding system of the MPEG system into the VP system, or the H.264 system. H.264. It may be converted to 265.
  • the encoding process can be performed by the terminal or one or more servers. Therefore, in the following, although the description such as “server” or “terminal” is used as the subject of processing, part or all of the processing performed by the server may be performed by the terminal, or the processing performed by the terminal Some or all may be performed on the server. In addition, with regard to these, the same applies to the decoding process.
  • the server not only encodes a two-dimensional moving image, but also automatically encodes a still image based on scene analysis of the moving image or at a time designated by the user and transmits it to the receiving terminal. It is also good. Furthermore, if the server can acquire relative positional relationship between the imaging terminals, the three-dimensional shape of the scene is not only determined based on the two-dimensional moving image but also the video of the same scene captured from different angles. Can be generated. Note that the server may separately encode three-dimensional data generated by a point cloud or the like, or an image to be transmitted to the receiving terminal based on a result of recognizing or tracking a person or an object using the three-dimensional data. Alternatively, it may be generated by selecting or reconfiguring from videos taken by a plurality of terminals.
  • the user can enjoy the scene by arbitrarily selecting each video corresponding to each photographing terminal, or from the three-dimensional data reconstructed using a plurality of images or videos, the video of the arbitrary viewpoint You can also enjoy the extracted content.
  • the sound may be picked up from a plurality of different angles as well as the video, and the server may multiplex the sound from a specific angle or space with the video and transmit it according to the video.
  • the server may create viewpoint images for the right eye and for the left eye, respectively, and may perform coding to allow reference between each viewpoint video using Multi-View Coding (MVC) or the like. It may be encoded as another stream without reference. At the time of decoding of another stream, reproduction may be performed in synchronization with each other so that a virtual three-dimensional space is reproduced according to the viewpoint of the user.
  • MVC Multi-View Coding
  • the server superimposes virtual object information in the virtual space on camera information in the real space based on the three-dimensional position or the movement of the user's viewpoint.
  • the decoding apparatus may acquire or hold virtual object information and three-dimensional data, generate a two-dimensional image according to the movement of the user's viewpoint, and create superimposed data by smoothly connecting.
  • the decoding device transmits the motion of the user's viewpoint to the server in addition to the request for virtual object information, and the server creates superimposed data in accordance with the motion of the viewpoint received from the three-dimensional data held in the server.
  • the superimposed data may be encoded and distributed to the decoding device.
  • the superimposed data has an ⁇ value indicating transparency as well as RGB
  • the server sets the ⁇ value of a portion other than the object created from the three-dimensional data to 0 etc., and the portion is transparent , May be encoded.
  • the server may set RGB values of predetermined values as a background, such as chroma key, and generate data in which the portion other than the object has a background color.
  • the decryption processing of the distributed data may be performed by each terminal which is a client, may be performed by the server side, or may be performed sharing each other.
  • one terminal may send a reception request to the server once, the content corresponding to the request may be received by another terminal and decoded, and the decoded signal may be transmitted to a device having a display. Data of high image quality can be reproduced by distributing processing and selecting appropriate content regardless of the performance of the communicable terminal itself.
  • a viewer's personal terminal may decode and display a partial area such as a tile in which a picture is divided. Thereby, it is possible to confirm at hand the area in which the user is in charge or the area to be checked in more detail while sharing the whole image.
  • encoded data over the network such as encoded data being cached on a server that can be accessed in a short time from a receiving terminal, or copied to an edge server in a content delivery service, etc. It is also possible to switch the bit rate of the received data based on ease.
  • the server may have a plurality of streams with the same content but different qualities as individual streams, but is temporally / spatial scalable which is realized by coding into layers as shown in the figure.
  • the configuration may be such that the content is switched using the feature of the stream. That is, the decoding side determines low-resolution content and high-resolution content by determining which layer to decode depending on the internal factor of performance and external factors such as the state of the communication band. It can be switched freely and decoded. For example, when it is desired to view the continuation of the video being watched by the smartphone ex115 while moving on a device such as the Internet TV after returning home, the device only has to decode the same stream to different layers, so the burden on the server side Can be reduced.
  • the picture is encoded for each layer, and the enhancement layer includes meta information based on statistical information of the image, etc., in addition to the configuration for realizing the scalability in which the enhancement layer exists above the base layer.
  • the decoding side may generate high-quality content by super-resolving a picture of the base layer based on the meta information.
  • the super resolution may be either an improvement in the SN ratio at the same resolution or an expansion of the resolution.
  • Meta information includes information for identifying linear or non-linear filter coefficients used for super-resolution processing, or information for identifying parameter values in filter processing used for super-resolution processing, machine learning or least squares operation, etc. .
  • the picture may be divided into tiles or the like according to the meaning of an object or the like in the image, and the decoding side may be configured to decode only a part of the area by selecting the tile to be decoded.
  • the decoding side can set the position of the desired object based on the meta information. And determine the tile that contains the object. For example, as shown in FIG. 35, meta information is stored using a data storage structure different from pixel data, such as an SEI message in HEVC. This meta information indicates, for example, the position, size, or color of the main object.
  • meta information may be stored in units of a plurality of pictures, such as streams, sequences, or random access units.
  • the decoding side can acquire the time when a specific person appears in the video and the like, and can identify the picture in which the object exists and the position of the object in the picture by combining the information with the picture unit.
  • FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page in the computer ex111 and the like.
  • FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page in the smartphone ex115 and the like.
  • a web page may include a plurality of link images which are links to image content, and the appearance differs depending on the viewing device.
  • the display device When multiple link images are visible on the screen, the display device until the user explicitly selects the link image, or until the link image approaches near the center of the screen or the entire link image falls within the screen
  • the (decoding device) displays still images or I pictures of each content as link images, displays images such as gif animation with a plurality of still images or I pictures, etc., receives only the base layer Decode and display.
  • the display device decodes the base layer with the highest priority.
  • the display device may decode up to the enhancement layer if there is information indicating that the content is scalable in the HTML configuring the web page.
  • the display device decodes only forward referenced pictures (I picture, P picture, forward referenced only B picture) before the selection or when the communication band is very strict. And, by displaying, it is possible to reduce the delay between the decoding time of the leading picture and the display time (delay from the start of decoding of the content to the start of display).
  • the display device may roughly ignore the reference relationship of pictures and roughly decode all B pictures and P pictures with forward reference, and may perform normal decoding as time passes and the number of received pictures increases.
  • the receiving terminal when transmitting or receiving still image or video data such as two-dimensional or three-dimensional map information for automatic traveling or driving assistance of a car, the receiving terminal is added as image information belonging to one or more layers as meta information Information on weather or construction may also be received, and these may be correlated and decoded.
  • the meta information may belong to the layer or may be simply multiplexed with the image data.
  • the receiving terminal since a car including a receiving terminal, a drone or an airplane moves, the receiving terminal transmits the position information of the receiving terminal at the time of reception request to seamlessly receive and decode while switching the base stations ex106 to ex110. Can be realized.
  • the receiving terminal can dynamically switch how much meta information is received or how much map information is updated according to the user's selection, the user's situation or the state of the communication band. become.
  • the client can receive, decode, and reproduce the encoded information transmitted by the user in real time.
  • the server may perform the encoding process after performing the editing process. This can be realized, for example, with the following configuration.
  • the server performs recognition processing such as shooting error, scene search, meaning analysis, and object detection from the original image or encoded data after shooting in real time or by accumulation. Then, the server manually or automatically corrects out-of-focus or camera shake, etc. based on the recognition result, or a scene with low importance such as a scene whose brightness is low or out of focus compared with other pictures. Make edits such as deleting, emphasizing the edge of an object, or changing the color. The server encodes the edited data based on the edited result. It is also known that the audience rating drops when the shooting time is too long, and the server works not only with scenes with low importance as described above, but also moves as content becomes within a specific time range according to the shooting time. Scenes with a small amount of motion may be clipped automatically based on the image processing result. Alternatively, the server may generate and encode a digest based on the result of semantic analysis of the scene.
  • recognition processing such as shooting error, scene search, meaning analysis, and object detection from the original image or encoded data after shooting in real
  • the server may change and encode the face of a person at the periphery of the screen, or the inside of a house, etc. into an image out of focus.
  • the server recognizes whether or not the face of a person different from the person registered in advance appears in the image to be encoded, and if so, performs processing such as mosaicing the face portion. May be Alternatively, the user designates a person or background area desired to process an image from the viewpoint of copyright etc.
  • preprocessing or post-processing of encoding replaces the designated area with another video or blurs the focus. It is also possible to perform such processing. If it is a person, it is possible to replace the image of the face part while tracking the person in the moving image.
  • the decoding apparatus first receives the base layer with the highest priority, and performs decoding and reproduction, although it depends on the bandwidth.
  • the decoding device may receive the enhancement layer during this period, and may play back high-quality video including the enhancement layer if it is played back more than once, such as when playback is looped.
  • scalable coding it is possible to provide an experience in which the stream gradually becomes smart and the image becomes better although it is a rough moving image when it is not selected or when it starts watching.
  • the same experience can be provided even if the coarse stream played back first and the second stream coded with reference to the first moving image are configured as one stream .
  • these encoding or decoding processes are generally processed in an LSI ex 500 that each terminal has.
  • the LSI ex 500 may be a single chip or a plurality of chips.
  • Software for moving image encoding or decoding is incorporated in any recording medium (CD-ROM, flexible disk, hard disk, etc.) readable by computer ex111 or the like, and encoding or decoding is performed using the software. It is also good.
  • moving image data acquired by the camera may be transmitted. The moving image data at this time is data encoded by the LSI ex 500 included in the smartphone ex 115.
  • the LSI ex 500 may be configured to download and activate application software.
  • the terminal first determines whether the terminal corresponds to the content coding scheme or has the ability to execute a specific service. If the terminal does not support the content encoding method or does not have the ability to execute a specific service, the terminal downloads the codec or application software, and then acquires and reproduces the content.
  • the present invention is not limited to the content supply system ex100 via the Internet ex101, but is also applicable to at least a moving picture coding apparatus (image coding apparatus) or a moving picture decoding apparatus (image decoding apparatus) of the above embodiments Can be incorporated. There is a difference in that it is multicast-oriented with respect to the configuration in which the content supply system ex100 can be easily unicasted, since multiplexed data in which video and sound are multiplexed is transmitted on broadcast radio waves using satellites etc. Similar applications are possible for the encoding process and the decoding process.
  • FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the smartphone ex115. Further, FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the smartphone ex115.
  • the smartphone ex115 receives an antenna ex450 for transmitting and receiving radio waves to and from the base station ex110, a camera unit ex465 capable of taking video and still images, a video taken by the camera unit ex465, and the antenna ex450 And a display unit ex ⁇ b> 458 for displaying data obtained by decoding an image or the like.
  • the smartphone ex115 further includes an operation unit ex466 that is a touch panel or the like, a voice output unit ex457 that is a speaker or the like for outputting voice or sound, a voice input unit ex456 that is a microphone or the like for inputting voice, Identify the user, the memory unit ex 467 capable of storing encoded video or still image, recorded voice, received video or still image, encoded data such as mail, or decoded data, and specify a network, etc. And a slot unit ex464 that is an interface unit with the SIM ex 468 for authenticating access to various data. Note that an external memory may be used instead of the memory unit ex467.
  • a main control unit ex460 that integrally controls the display unit ex458 and the operation unit ex466, a power supply circuit unit ex461, an operation input control unit ex462, a video signal processing unit ex455, a camera interface unit ex463, a display control unit ex459, / Demodulation unit ex452, multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453, audio signal processing unit ex454, slot unit ex464, and memory unit ex467 are connected via a bus ex470.
  • the power supply circuit unit ex461 activates the smartphone ex115 to an operable state by supplying power from the battery pack to each unit.
  • the smartphone ex115 performs processing such as call and data communication based on control of the main control unit ex460 having a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
  • the audio signal collected by the audio input unit ex456 is converted to a digital audio signal by the audio signal processing unit ex454, spread spectrum processing is performed by the modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and digital analog conversion is performed by the transmission / reception unit ex451.
  • transmission is performed via the antenna ex450.
  • the received data is amplified and subjected to frequency conversion processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing, subjected to spectrum despreading processing by modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and converted to an analog sound signal by sound signal processing unit ex454.
  • Output from In the data communication mode text, still images, or video data are sent to the main control unit ex460 via the operation input control unit ex462 by the operation of the operation unit ex466 or the like of the main unit, and transmission and reception processing is similarly performed.
  • the video signal processing unit ex 455 executes the video signal stored in the memory unit ex 467 or the video signal input from the camera unit ex 465 as described above.
  • the video data is compressed and encoded by the moving picture encoding method shown in the form and the encoded video data is sent to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453.
  • the audio signal processing unit ex454 encodes an audio signal collected by the audio input unit ex456 while capturing a video or a still image with the camera unit ex465, and sends the encoded audio data to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453.
  • the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 multiplexes the encoded video data and the encoded audio data according to a predetermined method, and performs modulation processing and conversion by the modulation / demodulation unit (modulation / demodulation circuit unit) ex452 and the transmission / reception unit ex451. It processes and transmits via antenna ex450.
  • the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 multiplexes in order to decode multiplexed data received via the antenna ex450.
  • the multiplexed data is divided into a bit stream of video data and a bit stream of audio data, and the encoded video data is supplied to the video signal processing unit ex455 via the synchronization bus ex470, and The converted audio data is supplied to the audio signal processing unit ex 454.
  • the video signal processing unit ex 455 decodes the video signal by the moving picture decoding method corresponding to the moving picture coding method described in each of the above embodiments, and is linked from the display unit ex 458 via the display control unit ex 459. An image or a still image included in the moving image file is displayed.
  • the audio signal processing unit ex 454 decodes the audio signal, and the audio output unit ex 457 outputs the audio. Furthermore, since real-time streaming is widespread, depending on the user's situation, it may happen that sound reproduction is not socially appropriate. Therefore, as an initial value, it is preferable to have a configuration in which only the video data is reproduced without reproducing the audio signal. Audio may be synchronized and played back only when the user performs an operation such as clicking on video data.
  • the smartphone ex115 has been described as an example, in addition to a transceiving terminal having both an encoder and a decoder as a terminal, a transmitting terminal having only the encoder and a receiver having only the decoder There are three possible implementation forms: terminals. Furthermore, in the digital broadcasting system, it has been described that multiplexed data in which audio data is multiplexed with video data is received or transmitted, but in multiplexed data, character data related to video other than audio data is also described. It may be multiplexed, or video data itself may be received or transmitted, not multiplexed data.
  • the terminal often includes a GPU. Therefore, a configuration in which a large area is collectively processed using the performance of the GPU may be performed using a memory shared by the CPU and the GPU, or a memory whose address is managed so as to be commonly used. As a result, coding time can be shortened, real time property can be secured, and low delay can be realized. In particular, it is efficient to perform processing of motion search, deblock filter, sample adaptive offset (SAO), and transform / quantization collectively in units of pictures or the like on the GPU instead of the CPU.
  • SAO sample adaptive offset
  • This aspect may be practiced in combination with at least some of the other aspects in the present disclosure.
  • part of the processing described in the flowchart of this aspect part of the configuration of the apparatus, part of the syntax, and the like may be implemented in combination with other aspects.
  • the present disclosure is applicable to, for example, television receivers, digital video recorders, car navigation systems, mobile phones, digital cameras, digital video cameras, video conference systems, electronic mirrors, and the like.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)

Abstract

An encoding device (100) is provided with a circuit (160) and a memory (162), the circuit (160): applying, using the memory (162), a deblocking filter process to a boundary between a subject block and adjacent blocks (S252) when a difference between a first luminance correction parameter used in a predicted image luminance correction process for the object block and a second luminance correction parameter used in a luminance correction process for adjacent blocks adjoining the subject block is greater than a predetermined threshold value (Yes in S251); and not applying the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the subject block and the adjacent blocks (S253) when the difference is less than the threshold value (No in S251).

Description

符号化装置、復号装置、符号化方法及び復号方法Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
　本開示は、符号化装置、復号装置、符号化方法及び復号方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, and a decoding method.
　従来、動画像を符号化するための規格として、Ｈ．２６５が存在する。Ｈ．２６５は、ＨＥＶＣ（Ｈｉｇｈ　Ｅｆｆｉｃｉｅｎｃｙ　Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｄｉｎｇ）とも呼ばれる。 Conventionally, as a standard for coding a moving image, H.264 is used. There are 265. H. H.265 is also referred to as HEVC (High Efficiency Video Coding).
　このような、符号化方法及び復号方法では、復号画像の画質を向上できることが望まれている。 In such encoding method and decoding method, it is desired that the quality of the decoded image can be improved.
　本開示は、復号画像の画質を向上できる符号化装置、復号装置、符号化方法又は復号方法を提供することを目的とする。 The present disclosure aims to provide an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, or a decoding method that can improve the quality of a decoded image.
　本開示の一態様に係る符号化装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する前記輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 An encoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to perform a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block. If the difference between the second block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction process for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is larger than a predetermined threshold value, deblocking filtering is performed on the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block. Apply and the deblocking filtering is not applied to the boundary if the difference is smaller than the threshold.
　本開示の一態様に係る復号装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する前記輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 A decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, the circuit using the memory, a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block, and If the difference between the second block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction process for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is larger than a predetermined threshold, deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block. If the difference is smaller than the threshold, the deblocking filtering process is not applied to the boundary.
　なお、これらの包括的又は具体的な態様は、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、又は、コンピュータ読み取り可能なＣＤ－ＲＯＭなどの非一時的な記録媒体で実現されてもよく、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、及び、記録媒体の任意な組み合わせで実現されてもよい。 Note that these general or specific aspects may be realized by a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a non-transitory recording medium such as a computer readable CD-ROM, and the system The present invention may be realized as any combination of an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, and a storage medium.
　本開示は、復号画像の画質を向上できる符号化装置、復号装置、符号化方法又は復号方法を提供できる。 The present disclosure can provide an encoding device, a decoding device, an encoding method, or a decoding method that can improve the quality of a decoded image.
図１は、実施の形態１に係る符号化装置の機能構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the coding apparatus according to the first embodiment. 図２は、実施の形態１におけるブロック分割の一例を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of block division in the first embodiment. 図３は、各変換タイプに対応する変換基底関数を示す表である。FIG. 3 is a table showing transform basis functions corresponding to each transform type. 図４Ａは、ＡＬＦで用いられるフィルタの形状の一例を示す図である。FIG. 4A is a view showing an example of the shape of a filter used in ALF. 図４Ｂは、ＡＬＦで用いられるフィルタの形状の他の一例を示す図である。FIG. 4B is a view showing another example of the shape of a filter used in ALF. 図４Ｃは、ＡＬＦで用いられるフィルタの形状の他の一例を示す図である。FIG. 4C is a view showing another example of the shape of a filter used in ALF. 図５Ａは、イントラ予測における６７個のイントラ予測モードを示す図である。FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating 67 intra prediction modes in intra prediction. 図５Ｂは、ＯＢＭＣ処理による予測画像補正処理の概要を説明するためのフローチャートである。FIG. 5B is a flowchart for describing an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing. 図５Ｃは、ＯＢＭＣ処理による予測画像補正処理の概要を説明するための概念図である。FIG. 5C is a conceptual diagram for describing an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing. 図５Ｄは、ＦＲＵＣの一例を示す図である。FIG. 5D is a diagram illustrating an example of FRUC. 図６は、動き軌道に沿う２つのブロック間でのパターンマッチング（バイラテラルマッチング）を説明するための図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram for describing pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along a motion trajectory. 図７は、カレントピクチャ内のテンプレートと参照ピクチャ内のブロックとの間でのパターンマッチング（テンプレートマッチング）を説明するための図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram for describing pattern matching (template matching) between a template in a current picture and a block in a reference picture. 図８は、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルを説明するための図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming uniform linear motion. 図９Ａは、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づくサブブロック単位の動きベクトルの導出を説明するための図である。FIG. 9A is a diagram for describing derivation of a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. 図９Ｂは、マージモードによる動きベクトル導出処理の概要を説明するための図である。FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing an overview of motion vector derivation processing in the merge mode. 図９Ｃは、ＤＭＶＲ処理の概要を説明するための概念図である。FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for describing an overview of DMVR processing. 図９Ｄは、ＬＩＣ処理による輝度補正処理を用いた予測画像生成方法の概要を説明するための図である。FIG. 9D is a diagram for describing an outline of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing. 図１０は、実施の形態１に係る復号装置の機能構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment. 図１１は、実施の形態１に係るデブロッキングフィルタ処理の第１態様のフローチャートである。FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first mode of the deblocking filter process according to the first embodiment. 図１２は、実施の形態１に係る第１態様におけるＢｓ算出方法の例を示す図である。FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a Bs calculation method in the first aspect according to the first embodiment. 図１３は、実施の形態１に係る第１態様におけるＢｓ算出処理の第１の例のフローチャートである。FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a first example of the Bs calculation process according to the first aspect of the first embodiment. 図１４は、実施の形態１に係る第１態様におけるＢｓ算出方法の第１の例を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a first example of the Bs calculation method in the first aspect according to the first embodiment. 図１５は、実施の形態１に係る第１態様におけるＢｓ算出処理の第２の例のフローチャートである。FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a second example of the Bs calculation process according to the first aspect of the first embodiment. 図１６は、実施の形態１に係る第１態様におけるＢｓ算出方法の第２の例を示す図である。FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a second example of the Bs calculating method according to the first aspect of the first embodiment. 図１７は、実施の形態１に係る対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとの様子を示す図である。FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a state of a target block and an adjacent block according to the first embodiment. 図１８は、実施の形態１に係る対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとの様子を示す図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a state of a target block and an adjacent block according to the first embodiment. 図１９は、実施の形態１に係る第２態様におけるＢｓ算出方法の例を示す図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a Bs calculation method in the second aspect according to the first embodiment. 図２０は、実施の形態１に係る第２態様におけるＢｓ算出処理の第１の例のフローチャートである。FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a first example of the Bs calculation process in the second aspect according to the first embodiment. 図２１は、実施の形態１に係る第２態様におけるＢｓ算出方法の第１の例を示す図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a first example of the Bs calculation method in the second aspect according to Embodiment 1. 図２２は、実施の形態１に係る第２態様におけるＢｓ算出処理の第２の例のフローチャートである。FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a second example of the Bs calculation process according to the second aspect of the first embodiment. 図２３は、実施の形態１に係る第２態様におけるＢｓ算出方法の第２の例を示す図である。FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a second example of the Bs calculation method in the second aspect according to the first embodiment. 図２４は、実施の形態１に係るデブロッキングフィルタ処理のフローチャートである。FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the deblocking filter process according to the first embodiment. 図２５は、実施の形態１に係る第３態様におけるＢｓ算出方法の例を示す図である。FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a Bs calculation method in the third aspect relating to the first embodiment. 図２６は、実施の形態１に係る第３態様におけるＢｓ算出処理の第１の例のフローチャートである。FIG. 26 is a flowchart of a first example of the Bs calculation process according to the third aspect of the first embodiment. 図２７は、実施の形態１に係る第３態様におけるＢｓ算出方法の第１の例を示す図である。FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a first example of a Bs calculation method in the third aspect according to Embodiment 1. 図２８は、実施の形態１に係る第３態様におけるＢｓ算出処理の第２の例のフローチャートである。FIG. 28 is a flowchart of a second example of the Bs calculation process according to the third aspect of the first embodiment. 図２９は、実施の形態１に係る第３態様におけるＢｓ算出方法の第２の例を示す図である。FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a second example of the Bs calculation method in the third aspect according to Embodiment 1. 図３０は、実施の形態１に係るデブロッキングフィルタ処理のフローチャートである。FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the deblocking filter process according to the first embodiment. 図３１は、符号化装置の実装例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of a coding apparatus. 図３２は、復号装置の実装例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of a decoding device. 図３３は、コンテンツ配信サービスを実現するコンテンツ供給システムの全体構成図である。FIG. 33 is an overall configuration diagram of a content supply system for realizing content distribution service. 図３４は、スケーラブル符号化時の符号化構造の一例を示す図である。FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coding structure at the time of scalable coding. 図３５は、スケーラブル符号化時の符号化構造の一例を示す図である。FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coding structure at the time of scalable coding. 図３６は、ｗｅｂページの表示画面例を示す図である。FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page. 図３７は、ｗｅｂページの表示画面例を示す図である。FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page. 図３８は、スマートフォンの一例を示す図である。FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a smartphone. 図３９は、スマートフォンの構成例を示すブロック図である。FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a smartphone.
　本開示の一態様に係る符号化装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する前記輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 An encoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, and the circuit uses the memory to perform a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block. If the difference between the second block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction process for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is larger than a predetermined threshold value, deblocking filtering is performed on the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block. Apply and the deblocking filtering is not applied to the boundary if the difference is smaller than the threshold.
　これによれば、当該符号化装置は、対象ブロックの輝度補正パラメータと隣接ブロックの輝度補正パラメータとの差が閾値より大きい場合にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行う。これにより、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できるので復号画像の画質を向上できる。また、当該符号化装置は、上記差が閾値より小さい場合にはデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行わない。これにより、当該符号化装置は、過度にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることを抑制できる。 According to this, the coding apparatus performs the deblocking filter process when the difference between the luminance correction parameter of the target block and the luminance correction parameter of the adjacent block is larger than the threshold. As a result, block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved. Further, the coding apparatus does not perform deblocking filter processing when the difference is smaller than the threshold. Thus, the encoding apparatus can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
　例えば、前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックの一方に対して前記輝度補正処理を適用し、前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックの他方に対して前記輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用してもよい。 For example, when the luminance correction process is applied to one of the target block and the adjacent block, and the luminance correction process is not applied to the other of the target block and the adjacent block, the deblocking filter is applied to the boundary Processing may be applied.
　これによれば、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できるので復号画像の画質を向上できる。 According to this, it is possible to reduce subjectively noticeable block noise, so it is possible to improve the image quality of the decoded image.
　例えば、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとのいずれに対しても前記輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しなくてもよい。 For example, when the luminance correction process is not applied to any of the target block and the adjacent block, the deblocking filter process may not be applied to the boundary.
　これによれば、当該符号化装置は、過度にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることを抑制できる。 According to this, the encoding apparatus can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
　例えば、前記輝度補正処理はＬＩＣ（Ｌｏｃａｌ　Ｉｌｌｕｍｉｎａｔｉｏｎ　Ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ）処理であってもよい。 For example, the brightness correction process may be a LIC (Local Illumination Compensation) process.
　例えば、前記差が前記閾値より大きい場合、前記境界の境界強度を示すＢｓを０以外の値に設定することで、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記Ｂｓを０に設定することで、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しなくてもよい。 For example, when the difference is larger than the threshold, the deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than 0, and the difference is smaller than the threshold. The deblocking filtering process may not be applied to the boundary by setting the Bs to 0.
　例えば、前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックは、予測処理の単位ブロックであってもよい。 For example, the target block and the adjacent block may be unit blocks of prediction processing.
　本開示の一態様に係る復号装置は、回路と、メモリと、を備え、前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する前記輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 A decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a circuit and a memory, the circuit using the memory, a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block, and If the difference between the second block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction process for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is larger than a predetermined threshold, deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block. If the difference is smaller than the threshold, the deblocking filtering process is not applied to the boundary.
　これによれば、当該復号装置は、対象ブロックの輝度補正パラメータと隣接ブロックの輝度補正パラメータとの差が閾値より大きい場合にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行う。これにより、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できるので復号画像の画質を向上できる。また、当該復号装置は、上記差が閾値より小さい場合にはデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行わない。これにより、当該復号装置は、過度にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることを抑制できる。 According to this, the said decoding apparatus performs a deblocking filter process, when the difference of the brightness correction parameter of an object block and the brightness correction parameter of an adjacent block is larger than a threshold value. As a result, block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved. Further, the decoding device does not perform the deblocking filter process when the difference is smaller than the threshold. Thereby, the said decoding apparatus can suppress that deblocking filter processing is performed excessively.
　例えば、前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックの一方に対して前記輝度補正処理を適用し、前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックの他方に対して前記輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用してもよい。 For example, when the luminance correction process is applied to one of the target block and the adjacent block, and the luminance correction process is not applied to the other of the target block and the adjacent block, the deblocking filter is applied to the boundary Processing may be applied.
　これによれば、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できるので復号画像の画質を向上できる。 According to this, it is possible to reduce subjectively noticeable block noise, so it is possible to improve the image quality of the decoded image.
　例えば、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとのいずれに対しても前記輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しなくてもよい。 For example, when the luminance correction process is not applied to any of the target block and the adjacent block, the deblocking filter process may not be applied to the boundary.
　これによれば、当該復号装置は、過度にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることを抑制できる。 According to this, the decoding apparatus can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
　例えば、前記輝度補正処理はＬＩＣ（Ｌｏｃａｌ　Ｉｌｌｕｍｉｎａｔｉｏｎ　Ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ）処理であってもよい。 For example, the brightness correction process may be a LIC (Local Illumination Compensation) process.
　例えば、前記差が前記閾値より大きい場合、前記境界の境界強度を示すＢｓを０以外の値に設定することで、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記Ｂｓを０に設定することで、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しなくてもよい。 For example, when the difference is larger than the threshold, the deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than 0, and the difference is smaller than the threshold. The deblocking filtering process may not be applied to the boundary by setting the Bs to 0.
　例えば、前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックは、予測処理の単位ブロックであってもよい。 For example, the target block and the adjacent block may be unit blocks of prediction processing.
　本開示の一態様に係る符号化方法は、対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する前記輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 An encoding method according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block, and a second luminance correction parameter used for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. If the difference between the correction parameter and the correction parameter is larger than a predetermined threshold value, deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block, and if the difference is smaller than the threshold value, the deblocking filter is applied to the boundary Do not apply processing.
　これによれば、当該符号化方法は、対象ブロックの輝度補正パラメータと隣接ブロックの輝度補正パラメータとの差が閾値より大きい場合にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行う。これにより、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できるので復号画像の画質を向上できる。また、当該符号化方法は、上記差が閾値より小さい場合にはデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行わない。これにより、当該符号化方法は、過度にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることを抑制できる。 According to this, the said encoding method performs a deblocking filter process, when the difference of the brightness correction parameter of an object block and the brightness correction parameter of an adjacent block is larger than a threshold value. As a result, block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved. Further, the encoding method does not perform deblocking filter processing when the difference is smaller than the threshold. Thereby, the said encoding method can suppress that deblocking filter processing is performed excessively.
　本開示の一態様に係る復号方法は、対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する前記輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 A decoding method according to an aspect of the present disclosure includes a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing of a predicted image for a target block, and a second luminance correction used for the luminance correction processing for an adjacent block adjacent to the target block. Deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block if the difference between the parameter and the parameter is larger than a predetermined threshold, and the deblocking filtering is performed on the boundary if the difference is smaller than the threshold. Does not apply.
　これによれば、当該復号方法は、対象ブロックの輝度補正パラメータと隣接ブロックの輝度補正パラメータとの差が閾値より大きい場合にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行う。これにより、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できるので復号画像の画質を向上できる。また、当該復号方法は、上記差が閾値より小さい場合にはデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行わない。これにより、当該復号方法は、過度にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることを抑制できる。 According to this, the said decoding method performs a deblocking filter process, when the difference of the brightness correction parameter of an object block and the brightness correction parameter of an adjacent block is larger than a threshold value. As a result, block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved. Further, the decoding method does not perform the deblocking filter process when the difference is smaller than the threshold. Thereby, the said decoding method can suppress that deblocking filter processing is performed excessively.
　さらに、これらの包括的又は具体的な態様は、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、又は、コンピュータ読み取り可能なＣＤ－ＲＯＭなどの非一時的な記録媒体で実現されてもよく、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム、及び、記録媒体の任意な組み合わせで実現されてもよい。 Furthermore, these general or specific aspects may be realized by a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a non-transitory recording medium such as a computer readable CD-ROM, and the system The present invention may be realized as any combination of an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, and a storage medium.
　以下、実施の形態について図面を参照しながら具体的に説明する。 Embodiments will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.
　なお、以下で説明する実施の形態は、いずれも包括的または具体的な例を示すものである。以下の実施の形態で示される数値、形状、材料、構成要素、構成要素の配置位置及び接続形態、ステップ、ステップの順序などは、一例であり、請求の範囲を限定する主旨ではない。また、以下の実施の形態における構成要素のうち、最上位概念を示す独立請求項に記載されていない構成要素については、任意の構成要素として説明される。 The embodiments described below are all inclusive or specific examples. Numerical values, shapes, materials, components, arrangement positions and connection forms of components, steps, order of steps, and the like shown in the following embodiments are merely examples, and are not intended to limit the scope of the claims. Further, among the components in the following embodiments, components not described in the independent claim indicating the highest concept are described as arbitrary components.
　（実施の形態１）
　まず、後述する本開示の各態様で説明する処理および／または構成を適用可能な符号化装置および復号化装置の一例として、実施の形態１の概要を説明する。ただし、実施の形態１は、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および／または構成を適用可能な符号化装置および復号化装置の一例にすぎず、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および／または構成は、実施の形態１とは異なる符号化装置および復号化装置においても実施可能である。 Embodiment 1
First, an outline of the first embodiment will be described as an example of an encoding apparatus and a decoding apparatus to which the process and / or the configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure described later can be applied. However, Embodiment 1 is merely an example of an encoding apparatus and a decoding apparatus to which the process and / or the configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure can be applied, and the processing and / or the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure The configuration can also be implemented in a coding apparatus and a decoding apparatus that are different from the first embodiment.
　実施の形態１に対して本開示の各態様で説明する処理および／または構成を適用する場合、例えば以下のいずれかを行ってもよい。 When the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure is applied to Embodiment 1, for example, any of the following may be performed.
　（１）実施の形態１の符号化装置または復号化装置に対して、当該符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうち、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に対応する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に置き換えること
　（２）実施の形態１の符号化装置または復号化装置に対して、当該符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうち一部の構成要素について機能または実施する処理の追加、置き換え、削除などの任意の変更を施した上で、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に対応する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素に置き換えること
　（３）実施の形態１の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に対して、処理の追加、および／または当該方法に含まれる複数の処理のうちの一部の処理について置き換え、削除などの任意の変更を施した上で、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に対応する処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に置き換えること
　（４）実施の形態１の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素と組み合わせて実施すること
　（５）実施の形態１の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または実施の形態１の符号化装置または復号化装置を構成する複数の構成要素のうちの一部の構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素を、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素、本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が備える機能の一部を備える構成要素、または本開示の各態様で説明する構成要素が実施する処理の一部を実施する構成要素と組み合わせて実施すること
　（６）実施の形態１の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に対して、当該方法に含まれる複数の処理のうち、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に対応する処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理に置き換えること
　（７）実施の形態１の符号化装置または復号化装置が実施する方法に含まれる複数の処理のうちの一部の処理を、本開示の各態様で説明する処理と組み合わせて実施すること (1) The encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment corresponds to the constituent elements described in each aspect of the present disclosure among a plurality of constituent elements that configure the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus. Replacing a component with a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure (2) A plurality of configurations constituting the encoding device or the decoding device with respect to the encoding device or the decoding device of the first embodiment A component corresponding to the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, after any change such as addition, replacement, or deletion of a function or processing to be performed on a part of components among elements, is disclosed (3) Addition of processing to the method performed by the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first embodiment, and / or a plurality of processes included in the method home Replacing a process corresponding to the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure with the process described in each aspect of the present disclosure after replacing some of the processes and arbitrary changes such as deletion. The component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure is a component of a part of the plurality of components constituting the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first aspect Implementing in combination with a component having a part of the functions to be provided or a component performing a part of the process performed by the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure (5) The encoding apparatus according to the first embodiment Or a component having a part of functions provided by a part of a plurality of components constituting the decoding apparatus, or a plurality of components constituting the coding apparatus or the decoding apparatus of the first embodiment Part of A component performing a part of the process performed by the component is a component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, a component provided with a part of the function of the component described in each aspect of the present disclosure, or the present Implementing in combination with a component that performs part of the processing performed by the components described in each aspect of the disclosure (6) For the method performed by the encoding apparatus or the decoding apparatus according to the first embodiment Replacing the processing corresponding to the processing described in each aspect of the present disclosure among the plurality of processing included in the method with the processing described in each aspect of the present disclosure (7) The encoding apparatus according to the first embodiment or Implementing some of the plurality of processes included in the method performed by the decoding device in combination with the processes described in each aspect of the present disclosure
　なお、本開示の各態様で説明する処理および／または構成の実施の仕方は、上記の例に限定されるものではない。例えば、実施の形態１において開示する動画像／画像符号化装置または動画像／画像復号化装置とは異なる目的で利用される装置において実施されてもよいし、各態様において説明した処理および／または構成を単独で実施してもよい。また、異なる態様において説明した処理および／または構成を組み合わせて実施してもよい。 Note that the manner of implementation of the processing and / or configuration described in each aspect of the present disclosure is not limited to the above example. For example, it may be implemented in an apparatus used for a purpose different from the moving picture / image coding apparatus or the moving picture / image decoding apparatus disclosed in the first embodiment, or the process and / or the process described in each aspect. The configuration may be implemented alone. Also, the processes and / or configurations described in the different embodiments may be implemented in combination.
　［符号化装置の概要］
　まず、実施の形態１に係る符号化装置の概要を説明する。図１は、実施の形態１に係る符号化装置１００の機能構成を示すブロック図である。符号化装置１００は、動画像／画像をブロック単位で符号化する動画像／画像符号化装置である。 [Overview of Encoding Device]
First, an outline of the coding apparatus according to Embodiment 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of coding apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment. The encoding device 100 is a moving image / image coding device that encodes a moving image / image in units of blocks.
　図１に示すように、符号化装置１００は、画像をブロック単位で符号化する装置であって、分割部１０２と、減算部１０４と、変換部１０６と、量子化部１０８と、エントロピー符号化部１１０と、逆量子化部１１２と、逆変換部１１４と、加算部１１６と、ブロックメモリ１１８と、ループフィルタ部１２０と、フレームメモリ１２２と、イントラ予測部１２４と、インター予測部１２６と、予測制御部１２８と、を備える。 As shown in FIG. 1, the encoding apparatus 100 is an apparatus for encoding an image in units of blocks, and includes a dividing unit 102, a subtracting unit 104, a converting unit 106, a quantizing unit 108, and entropy coding. Unit 110, inverse quantization unit 112, inverse transformation unit 114, addition unit 116, block memory 118, loop filter unit 120, frame memory 122, intra prediction unit 124, inter prediction unit 126, And a prediction control unit 128.
　符号化装置１００は、例えば、汎用プロセッサ及びメモリにより実現される。この場合、メモリに格納されたソフトウェアプログラムがプロセッサにより実行されたときに、プロセッサは、分割部１０２、減算部１０４、変換部１０６、量子化部１０８、エントロピー符号化部１１０、逆量子化部１１２、逆変換部１１４、加算部１１６、ループフィルタ部１２０、イントラ予測部１２４、インター予測部１２６及び予測制御部１２８として機能する。また、符号化装置１００は、分割部１０２、減算部１０４、変換部１０６、量子化部１０８、エントロピー符号化部１１０、逆量子化部１１２、逆変換部１１４、加算部１１６、ループフィルタ部１２０、イントラ予測部１２４、インター予測部１２６及び予測制御部１２８に対応する専用の１以上の電子回路として実現されてもよい。 The encoding device 100 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory. In this case, when the software program stored in the memory is executed by the processor, the processor controls the division unit 102, the subtraction unit 104, the conversion unit 106, the quantization unit 108, the entropy coding unit 110, and the dequantization unit 112. The inverse transform unit 114, the addition unit 116, the loop filter unit 120, the intra prediction unit 124, the inter prediction unit 126, and the prediction control unit 128 function. In addition, coding apparatus 100 includes division section 102, subtraction section 104, conversion section 106, quantization section 108, entropy coding section 110, inverse quantization section 112, inverse conversion section 114, addition section 116, and loop filter section 120. , And may be realized as one or more dedicated electronic circuits corresponding to the intra prediction unit 124, the inter prediction unit 126, and the prediction control unit 128.
　以下に、符号化装置１００に含まれる各構成要素について説明する。 Each component included in the encoding device 100 will be described below.
　［分割部］
　分割部１０２は、入力動画像に含まれる各ピクチャを複数のブロックに分割し、各ブロックを減算部１０４に出力する。例えば、分割部１０２は、まず、ピクチャを固定サイズ（例えば１２８ｘ１２８）のブロックに分割する。この固定サイズのブロックは、符号化ツリーユニット（ＣＴＵ）と呼ばれることがある。そして、分割部１０２は、再帰的な四分木（ｑｕａｄｔｒｅｅ）及び／又は二分木（ｂｉｎａｒｙ　ｔｒｅｅ）ブロック分割に基づいて、固定サイズのブロックの各々を可変サイズ（例えば６４ｘ６４以下）のブロックに分割する。この可変サイズのブロックは、符号化ユニット（ＣＵ）、予測ユニット（ＰＵ）あるいは変換ユニット（ＴＵ）と呼ばれることがある。なお、本実施の形態では、ＣＵ、ＰＵ及びＴＵは区別される必要はなく、ピクチャ内の一部又はすべてのブロックがＣＵ、ＰＵ、ＴＵの処理単位となってもよい。 [Division]
The dividing unit 102 divides each picture included in the input moving image into a plurality of blocks, and outputs each block to the subtracting unit 104. For example, the division unit 102 first divides a picture into blocks of a fixed size (for example, 128 × 128). This fixed size block may be referred to as a coding tree unit (CTU). Then, the dividing unit 102 divides each of fixed size blocks into blocks of variable size (for example, 64 × 64 or less) based on recursive quadtree and / or binary tree block division. . This variable sized block may be referred to as a coding unit (CU), a prediction unit (PU) or a transform unit (TU). In the present embodiment, CUs, PUs, and TUs need not be distinguished, and some or all of the blocks in a picture may be processing units of CUs, PUs, and TUs.
　図２は、実施の形態１におけるブロック分割の一例を示す図である。図２において、実線は四分木ブロック分割によるブロック境界を表し、破線は二分木ブロック分割によるブロック境界を表す。 FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of block division in the first embodiment. In FIG. 2, solid lines represent block boundaries by quadtree block division, and broken lines represent block boundaries by binary tree block division.
　ここでは、ブロック１０は、１２８ｘ１２８画素の正方形ブロック（１２８ｘ１２８ブロック）である。この１２８ｘ１２８ブロック１０は、まず、４つの正方形の６４ｘ６４ブロックに分割される（四分木ブロック分割）。 Here, the block 10 is a square block (128 × 128 block) of 128 × 128 pixels. The 128x128 block 10 is first divided into four square 64x64 blocks (quadtree block division).
　左上の６４ｘ６４ブロックは、さらに２つの矩形の３２ｘ６４ブロックに垂直に分割され、左の３２ｘ６４ブロックはさらに２つの矩形の１６ｘ６４ブロックに垂直に分割される（二分木ブロック分割）。その結果、左上の６４ｘ６４ブロックは、２つの１６ｘ６４ブロック１１、１２と、３２ｘ６４ブロック１３とに分割される。 The upper left 64x64 block is further vertically divided into two rectangular 32x64 blocks, and the left 32x64 block is further vertically divided into two rectangular 16x64 blocks (binary block division). As a result, the upper left 64x64 block is divided into two 16x64 blocks 11, 12 and a 32x64 block 13.
　右上の６４ｘ６４ブロックは、２つの矩形の６４ｘ３２ブロック１４、１５に水平に分割される（二分木ブロック分割）。 The upper right 64x64 block is divided horizontally into two rectangular 64x32 blocks 14 and 15 (binary block division).
　左下の６４ｘ６４ブロックは、４つの正方形の３２ｘ３２ブロックに分割される（四分木ブロック分割）。４つの３２ｘ３２ブロックのうち左上のブロック及び右下のブロックはさらに分割される。左上の３２ｘ３２ブロックは、２つの矩形の１６ｘ３２ブロックに垂直に分割され、右の１６ｘ３２ブロックはさらに２つの１６ｘ１６ブロックに水平に分割される（二分木ブロック分割）。右下の３２ｘ３２ブロックは、２つの３２ｘ１６ブロックに水平に分割される（二分木ブロック分割）。その結果、左下の６４ｘ６４ブロックは、１６ｘ３２ブロック１６と、２つの１６ｘ１６ブロック１７、１８と、２つの３２ｘ３２ブロック１９、２０と、２つの３２ｘ１６ブロック２１、２２とに分割される。 The lower left 64x64 block is divided into four square 32x32 blocks (quadtree block division). Of the four 32x32 blocks, the upper left block and the lower right block are further divided. The upper left 32x32 block is vertically divided into two rectangular 16x32 blocks, and the right 16x32 block is further horizontally split into two 16x16 blocks (binary block division). The lower right 32x32 block is divided horizontally into two 32x16 blocks (binary block division). As a result, the lower left 64x64 block is divided into a 16x32 block 16, two 16x16 blocks 17, 18, two 32x32 blocks 19, 20, and two 32x16 blocks 21, 22.
　右下の６４ｘ６４ブロック２３は分割されない。 The lower right 64x64 block 23 is not divided.
　以上のように、図２では、ブロック１０は、再帰的な四分木及び二分木ブロック分割に基づいて、１３個の可変サイズのブロック１１～２３に分割される。このような分割は、ＱＴＢＴ（ｑｕａｄ－ｔｒｅｅ　ｐｌｕｓ　ｂｉｎａｒｙ　ｔｒｅｅ）分割と呼ばれることがある。 As described above, in FIG. 2, the block 10 is divided into thirteen variable sized blocks 11 to 23 based on recursive quadtree and binary tree block division. Such division is sometimes called quad-tree plus binary tree (QTBT) division.
　なお、図２では、１つのブロックが４つ又は２つのブロックに分割されていたが（四分木又は二分木ブロック分割）、分割はこれに限定されない。例えば、１つのブロックが３つのブロックに分割されてもよい（三分木ブロック分割）。このような三分木ブロック分割を含む分割は、ＭＢＴ（ｍｕｌｔｉ　ｔｙｐｅ　ｔｒｅｅ）分割と呼ばれることがある。 Although one block is divided into four or two blocks (quadtree or binary tree block division) in FIG. 2, the division is not limited to this. For example, one block may be divided into three blocks (tri-tree block division). A partition including such a ternary tree block partition may be referred to as a multi type tree (MBT) partition.
　［減算部］
　減算部１０４は、分割部１０２によって分割されたブロック単位で原信号（原サンプル）から予測信号（予測サンプル）を減算する。つまり、減算部１０４は、符号化対象ブロック（以下、カレントブロックという）の予測誤差（残差ともいう）を算出する。そして、減算部１０４は、算出された予測誤差を変換部１０６に出力する。 [Subtractor]
The subtracting unit 104 subtracts a prediction signal (prediction sample) from an original signal (original sample) in block units divided by the dividing unit 102. That is, the subtraction unit 104 calculates a prediction error (also referred to as a residual) of the encoding target block (hereinafter, referred to as a current block). Then, the subtracting unit 104 outputs the calculated prediction error to the converting unit 106.
　原信号は、符号化装置１００の入力信号であり、動画像を構成する各ピクチャの画像を表す信号（例えば輝度（ｌｕｍａ）信号及び２つの色差（ｃｈｒｏｍａ）信号）である。以下において、画像を表す信号をサンプルともいうこともある。 The original signal is an input signal of the coding apparatus 100, and is a signal (for example, a luminance (luma) signal and two color difference (chroma) signals) representing an image of each picture constituting a moving image. In the following, a signal representing an image may also be referred to as a sample.
　［変換部］
　変換部１０６は、空間領域の予測誤差を周波数領域の変換係数に変換し、変換係数を量子化部１０８に出力する。具体的には、変換部１０６は、例えば空間領域の予測誤差に対して予め定められた離散コサイン変換（ＤＣＴ）又は離散サイン変換（ＤＳＴ）を行う。 [Converter]
Transform section 106 transforms the prediction error in the spatial domain into a transform coefficient in the frequency domain, and outputs the transform coefficient to quantization section 108. Specifically, the transform unit 106 performs, for example, discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) determined in advance on the prediction error in the spatial domain.
　なお、変換部１０６は、複数の変換タイプの中から適応的に変換タイプを選択し、選択された変換タイプに対応する変換基底関数（ｔｒａｎｓｆｏｒｍ　ｂａｓｉｓ　ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ）を用いて、予測誤差を変換係数に変換してもよい。このような変換は、ＥＭＴ（ｅｘｐｌｉｃｉｔ　ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ　ｃｏｒｅ　ｔｒａｎｓｆｏｒｍ）又はＡＭＴ（ａｄａｐｔｉｖｅ　ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ　ｔｒａｎｓｆｏｒｍ）と呼ばれることがある。 Transform section 106 adaptively selects a transform type from among a plurality of transform types, and transforms the prediction error into transform coefficients using a transform basis function corresponding to the selected transform type. You may Such transformation may be referred to as explicit multiple core transform (EMT) or adaptive multiple transform (AMT).
　複数の変換タイプは、例えば、ＤＣＴ－ＩＩ、ＤＣＴ－Ｖ、ＤＣＴ－ＶＩＩＩ、ＤＳＴ－Ｉ及びＤＳＴ－ＶＩＩを含む。図３は、各変換タイプに対応する変換基底関数を示す表である。図３においてＮは入力画素の数を示す。これらの複数の変換タイプの中からの変換タイプの選択は、例えば、予測の種類（イントラ予測及びインター予測）に依存してもよいし、イントラ予測モードに依存してもよい。 The plurality of transformation types include, for example, DCT-II, DCT-V, DCT-VIII, DST-I and DST-VII. FIG. 3 is a table showing transform basis functions corresponding to each transform type. In FIG. 3, N indicates the number of input pixels. The choice of transform type from among these multiple transform types may depend, for example, on the type of prediction (intra-prediction and inter-prediction) or depending on the intra-prediction mode.
　このようなＥＭＴ又はＡＭＴを適用するか否かを示す情報（例えばＡＭＴフラグと呼ばれる）及び選択された変換タイプを示す情報は、ＣＵレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化は、ＣＵレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル（例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はＣＴＵレベル）であってもよい。 Information indicating whether to apply such EMT or AMT (for example, called an AMT flag) and information indicating the selected conversion type are signaled at CU level. Note that the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
　また、変換部１０６は、変換係数（変換結果）を再変換してもよい。このような再変換は、ＡＳＴ（ａｄａｐｔｉｖｅ　ｓｅｃｏｎｄａｒｙ　ｔｒａｎｓｆｏｒｍ）又はＮＳＳＴ（ｎｏｎ－ｓｅｐａｒａｂｌｅ　ｓｅｃｏｎｄａｒｙ　ｔｒａｎｓｆｏｒｍ）と呼ばれることがある。例えば、変換部１０６は、イントラ予測誤差に対応する変換係数のブロックに含まれるサブブロック（例えば４ｘ４サブブロック）ごとに再変換を行う。ＮＳＳＴを適用するか否かを示す情報及びＮＳＳＴに用いられる変換行列に関する情報は、ＣＵレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化は、ＣＵレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル（例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はＣＴＵレベル）であってもよい。 Also, the conversion unit 106 may re-convert the conversion coefficient (conversion result). Such reconversion may be referred to as adaptive secondary transform (AST) or non-separable secondary transform (NSST). For example, the transform unit 106 performs retransformation for each sub block (for example, 4 × 4 sub blocks) included in the block of transform coefficients corresponding to the intra prediction error. The information indicating whether to apply the NSST and the information on the transformation matrix used for the NSST are signaled at the CU level. Note that the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
　ここで、Ｓｅｐａｒａｂｌｅな変換とは、入力の次元の数だけ方向ごとに分離して複数回変換を行う方式であり、Ｎｏｎ－Ｓｅｐａｒａｂｌｅな変換とは、入力が多次元であった際に２つ以上の次元をまとめて１次元とみなして、まとめて変換を行う方式である。 Here, Separable conversion is a method in which conversion is performed multiple times by separating in each direction as many as the number of dimensions of the input, and Non-Separable conversion is two or more when the input is multidimensional. This is a method of collectively converting the dimensions of 1 and 2 into one dimension.
　例えば、Ｎｏｎ－Ｓｅｐａｒａｂｌｅな変換の１例として、入力が４×４のブロックであった場合にはそれを１６個の要素を持ったひとつの配列とみなし、その配列に対して１６×１６の変換行列で変換処理を行うようなものが挙げられる。 For example, as an example of Non-Separable conversion, if the input is a 4 × 4 block, it is regarded as one array having 16 elements, and 16 × 16 conversion is performed on the array There is one that performs transformation processing with a matrix.
　また、同様に４×４の入力ブロックを１６個の要素を持ったひとつの配列とみなした後に、その配列に対してＧｉｖｅｎｓ回転を複数回行うようなもの（Ｈｙｐｅｒｃｕｂｅ　Ｇｉｖｅｎｓ　Ｔｒａｎｓｆｏｒｍ）もＮｏｎ－Ｓｅｐａｒａｂｌｅな変換の例である。 Similarly, if you consider 4x4 input blocks as one array with 16 elements, you can perform multiple Givens rotation on the array (Hypercube Givens Transform) as Non-Separable as well. It is an example of conversion.
　［量子化部］
　量子化部１０８は、変換部１０６から出力された変換係数を量子化する。具体的には、量子化部１０８は、カレントブロックの変換係数を所定の走査順序で走査し、走査された変換係数に対応する量子化パラメータ（ＱＰ）に基づいて当該変換係数を量子化する。そして、量子化部１０８は、カレントブロックの量子化された変換係数（以下、量子化係数という）をエントロピー符号化部１１０及び逆量子化部１１２に出力する。 [Quantizer]
The quantization unit 108 quantizes the transform coefficient output from the transform unit 106. Specifically, the quantization unit 108 scans the transform coefficient of the current block in a predetermined scan order, and quantizes the transform coefficient based on the quantization parameter (QP) corresponding to the scanned transform coefficient. Then, the quantization unit 108 outputs the quantized transform coefficient of the current block (hereinafter, referred to as a quantization coefficient) to the entropy coding unit 110 and the inverse quantization unit 112.
　所定の順序は、変換係数の量子化／逆量子化のための順序である。例えば、所定の走査順序は、周波数の昇順（低周波から高周波の順）又は降順（高周波から低周波の順）で定義される。 The predetermined order is an order for quantization / inverse quantization of transform coefficients. For example, the predetermined scan order is defined in ascending order (low frequency to high frequency) or descending order (high frequency to low frequency) of the frequency.
　量子化パラメータとは、量子化ステップ（量子化幅）を定義するパラメータである。例えば、量子化パラメータの値が増加すれば量子化ステップも増加する。つまり、量子化パラメータの値が増加すれば量子化誤差が増大する。 The quantization parameter is a parameter that defines a quantization step (quantization width). For example, if the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization step also increases. That is, as the value of the quantization parameter increases, the quantization error increases.
　［エントロピー符号化部］
　エントロピー符号化部１１０は、量子化部１０８から入力である量子化係数を可変長符号化することにより符号化信号（符号化ビットストリーム）を生成する。具体的には、エントロピー符号化部１１０は、例えば、量子化係数を二値化し、二値信号を算術符号化する。 [Entropy coding unit]
The entropy coding unit 110 generates a coded signal (coded bit stream) by subjecting the quantization coefficient input from the quantization unit 108 to variable-length coding. Specifically, for example, the entropy coding unit 110 binarizes the quantization coefficient and performs arithmetic coding on the binary signal.
　［逆量子化部］
　逆量子化部１１２は、量子化部１０８からの入力である量子化係数を逆量子化する。具体的には、逆量子化部１１２は、カレントブロックの量子化係数を所定の走査順序で逆量子化する。そして、逆量子化部１１２は、カレントブロックの逆量子化された変換係数を逆変換部１１４に出力する。 [Inverse quantization unit]
The inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient which is the input from the quantization unit 108. Specifically, the inverse quantization unit 112 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of the current block in a predetermined scan order. Then, the inverse quantization unit 112 outputs the inverse quantized transform coefficient of the current block to the inverse transform unit 114.
　［逆変換部］
　逆変換部１１４は、逆量子化部１１２からの入力である変換係数を逆変換することにより予測誤差を復元する。具体的には、逆変換部１１４は、変換係数に対して、変換部１０６による変換に対応する逆変換を行うことにより、カレントブロックの予測誤差を復元する。そして、逆変換部１１４は、復元された予測誤差を加算部１１６に出力する。 [Inverse converter]
The inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error by inversely transforming the transform coefficient which is the input from the inverse quantization unit 112. Specifically, the inverse transform unit 114 restores the prediction error of the current block by performing inverse transform corresponding to the transform by the transform unit 106 on the transform coefficient. Then, the inverse conversion unit 114 outputs the restored prediction error to the addition unit 116.
　なお、復元された予測誤差は、量子化により情報が失われているので、減算部１０４が算出した予測誤差と一致しない。すなわち、復元された予測誤差には、量子化誤差が含まれている。 The restored prediction error does not match the prediction error calculated by the subtracting unit 104 because the information is lost due to quantization. That is, the restored prediction error includes the quantization error.
　［加算部］
　加算部１１６は、逆変換部１１４からの入力である予測誤差と予測制御部１２８からの入力である予測サンプルとを加算することによりカレントブロックを再構成する。そして、加算部１１６は、再構成されたブロックをブロックメモリ１１８及びループフィルタ部１２０に出力する。再構成ブロックは、ローカル復号ブロックと呼ばれることもある。 [Adder]
The addition unit 116 reconstructs the current block by adding the prediction error, which is the input from the inverse conversion unit 114, and the prediction sample, which is the input from the prediction control unit 128. Then, the addition unit 116 outputs the reconstructed block to the block memory 118 and the loop filter unit 120. Reconstruction blocks may also be referred to as local decoding blocks.
　［ブロックメモリ］
　ブロックメモリ１１８は、イントラ予測で参照されるブロックであって符号化対象ピクチャ（以下、カレントピクチャという）内のブロックを格納するための記憶部である。具体的には、ブロックメモリ１１８は、加算部１１６から出力された再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Block memory]
The block memory 118 is a storage unit for storing a block in an encoding target picture (hereinafter referred to as a current picture) which is a block referred to in intra prediction. Specifically, the block memory 118 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 116.
　［ループフィルタ部］
　ループフィルタ部１２０は、加算部１１６によって再構成されたブロックにループフィルタを施し、フィルタされた再構成ブロックをフレームメモリ１２２に出力する。ループフィルタとは、符号化ループ内で用いられるフィルタ（インループフィルタ）であり、例えば、デブロッキング・フィルタ（ＤＦ）、サンプルアダプティブオフセット（ＳＡＯ）及びアダプティブループフィルタ（ＡＬＦ）などを含む。 [Loop filter section]
The loop filter unit 120 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 116, and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 122. The loop filter is a filter (in-loop filter) used in the coding loop, and includes, for example, a deblocking filter (DF), a sample adaptive offset (SAO), an adaptive loop filter (ALF) and the like.
　ＡＬＦでは、符号化歪みを除去するための最小二乗誤差フィルタが適用され、例えばカレントブロック内の２ｘ２サブブロックごとに、局所的な勾配（ｇｒａｄｉｅｎｔ）の方向及び活性度（ａｃｔｉｖｉｔｙ）に基づいて複数のフィルタの中から選択された１つのフィルタが適用される。 In ALF, a least squares error filter is applied to remove coding distortion, for example, multiple 2x2 subblocks in the current block, based on local gradient direction and activity. One filter selected from the filters is applied.
　具体的には、まず、サブブロック（例えば２ｘ２サブブロック）が複数のクラス（例えば１５又は２５クラス）に分類される。サブブロックの分類は、勾配の方向及び活性度に基づいて行われる。例えば、勾配の方向値Ｄ（例えば０～２又は０～４）と勾配の活性値Ａ（例えば０～４）とを用いて分類値Ｃ（例えばＣ＝５Ｄ＋Ａ）が算出される。そして、分類値Ｃに基づいて、サブブロックが複数のクラス（例えば１５又は２５クラス）に分類される。 Specifically, first, subblocks (for example, 2x2 subblocks) are classified into a plurality of classes (for example, 15 or 25 classes). Sub-block classification is performed based on the gradient direction and activity. For example, the classification value C (for example, C = 5 D + A) is calculated using the gradient direction value D (for example, 0 to 2 or 0 to 4) and the gradient activity value A (for example, 0 to 4). Then, based on the classification value C, the sub-blocks are classified into a plurality of classes (for example, 15 or 25 classes).
　勾配の方向値Ｄは、例えば、複数の方向（例えば水平、垂直及び２つの対角方向）の勾配を比較することにより導出される。また、勾配の活性値Ａは、例えば、複数の方向の勾配を加算し、加算結果を量子化することにより導出される。 The direction value D of the gradient is derived, for example, by comparing gradients in a plurality of directions (for example, horizontal, vertical and two diagonal directions). The gradient activation value A is derived, for example, by adding gradients in a plurality of directions and quantizing the addition result.
　このような分類の結果に基づいて、複数のフィルタの中からサブブロックのためのフィルタが決定される。 Based on the result of such classification, a filter for the subblock is determined among the plurality of filters.
　ＡＬＦで用いられるフィルタの形状としては例えば円対称形状が利用される。図４Ａ～図４Ｃは、ＡＬＦで用いられるフィルタの形状の複数の例を示す図である。図４Ａは、５ｘ５ダイヤモンド形状フィルタを示し、図４Ｂは、７ｘ７ダイヤモンド形状フィルタを示し、図４Ｃは、９ｘ９ダイヤモンド形状フィルタを示す。フィルタの形状を示す情報は、ピクチャレベルで信号化される。なお、フィルタの形状を示す情報の信号化は、ピクチャレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル（例えば、シーケンスレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、ＣＴＵレベル又はＣＵレベル）であってもよい。 For example, a circularly symmetrical shape is used as the shape of the filter used in ALF. FIGS. 4A to 4C are diagrams showing a plurality of examples of filter shapes used in ALF. FIG. 4A shows a 5 × 5 diamond shaped filter, FIG. 4B shows a 7 × 7 diamond shaped filter, and FIG. 4C shows a 9 × 9 diamond shaped filter. Information indicating the shape of the filter is signaled at the picture level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating the shape of the filter does not have to be limited to the picture level, and may be another level (for example, sequence level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or CU level).
　ＡＬＦのオン／オフは、例えば、ピクチャレベル又はＣＵレベルで決定される。例えば、輝度についてはＣＵレベルでＡＬＦを適用するか否かが決定され、色差についてはピクチャレベルでＡＬＦを適用するか否かが決定される。ＡＬＦのオン／オフを示す情報は、ピクチャレベル又はＣＵレベルで信号化される。なお、ＡＬＦのオン／オフを示す情報の信号化は、ピクチャレベル又はＣＵレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル（例えば、シーケンスレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はＣＴＵレベル）であってもよい。 The on / off of the ALF is determined, for example, at the picture level or the CU level. For example, as to luminance, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the CU level, and as to color difference, it is determined whether to apply ALF at the picture level. Information indicating on / off of ALF is signaled at picture level or CU level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating ALF on / off need not be limited to the picture level or CU level, and may be other levels (eg, sequence level, slice level, tile level or CTU level) Good.
　選択可能な複数のフィルタ（例えば１５又は２５までのフィルタ）の係数セットは、ピクチャレベルで信号化される。なお、係数セットの信号化は、ピクチャレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル（例えば、シーケンスレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、ＣＴＵレベル、ＣＵレベル又はサブブロックレベル）であってもよい。 The set of coefficients of the plurality of selectable filters (eg, up to 15 or 25 filters) is signaled at the picture level. Note that the signaling of the coefficient set need not be limited to the picture level, but may be other levels (eg, sequence level, slice level, tile level, CTU level, CU level or sub-block level).
　［フレームメモリ］
　フレームメモリ１２２は、インター予測に用いられる参照ピクチャを格納するための記憶部であり、フレームバッファと呼ばれることもある。具体的には、フレームメモリ１２２は、ループフィルタ部１２０によってフィルタされた再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Frame memory]
The frame memory 122 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and may be referred to as a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 122 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 120.
　［イントラ予測部］
　イントラ予測部１２４は、ブロックメモリ１１８に格納されたカレントピクチャ内のブロックを参照してカレントブロックのイントラ予測（画面内予測ともいう）を行うことで、予測信号（イントラ予測信号）を生成する。具体的には、イントラ予測部１２４は、カレントブロックに隣接するブロックのサンプル（例えば輝度値、色差値）を参照してイントラ予測を行うことでイントラ予測信号を生成し、イントラ予測信号を予測制御部１２８に出力する。 [Intra prediction unit]
The intra prediction unit 124 generates a prediction signal (intra prediction signal) by performing intra prediction (also referred to as in-screen prediction) of the current block with reference to a block in the current picture stored in the block memory 118. Specifically, the intra prediction unit 124 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to samples (for example, luminance value, color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. Output to the part 128.
　例えば、イントラ予測部１２４は、予め規定された複数のイントラ予測モードのうちの１つを用いてイントラ予測を行う。複数のイントラ予測モードは、１以上の非方向性予測モードと、複数の方向性予測モードと、を含む。 For example, the intra prediction unit 124 performs intra prediction using one of a plurality of predefined intra prediction modes. The plurality of intra prediction modes include one or more non-directional prediction modes and a plurality of directional prediction modes.
　１以上の非方向性予測モードは、例えばＨ．２６５／ＨＥＶＣ（Ｈｉｇｈ－Ｅｆｆｉｃｉｅｎｃｙ　Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｄｉｎｇ）規格（非特許文献１）で規定されたＰｌａｎａｒ予測モード及びＤＣ予測モードを含む。 One or more non-directional prediction modes are described in, for example, H.264. It includes Planar prediction mode and DC prediction mode defined in H.265 / High-Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard (Non-Patent Document 1).
　複数の方向性予測モードは、例えばＨ．２６５／ＨＥＶＣ規格で規定された３３方向の予測モードを含む。なお、複数の方向性予測モードは、３３方向に加えてさらに３２方向の予測モード（合計で６５個の方向性予測モード）を含んでもよい。図５Ａは、イントラ予測における６７個のイントラ予測モード（２個の非方向性予測モード及び６５個の方向性予測モード）を示す図である。実線矢印は、Ｈ．２６５／ＨＥＶＣ規格で規定された３３方向を表し、破線矢印は、追加された３２方向を表す。 The plurality of directionality prediction modes are, for example, H.264. It includes 33 directional prediction modes defined by the H.265 / HEVC standard. In addition to the 33 directions, the plurality of directionality prediction modes may further include 32 direction prediction modes (a total of 65 directionality prediction modes). FIG. 5A is a diagram showing 67 intra prediction modes (2 non-directional prediction modes and 65 directional prediction modes) in intra prediction. Solid arrows indicate H. A broken line arrow represents the added 32 directions, which represents the 33 directions defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard.
　なお、色差ブロックのイントラ予測において、輝度ブロックが参照されてもよい。つまり、カレントブロックの輝度成分に基づいて、カレントブロックの色差成分が予測されてもよい。このようなイントラ予測は、ＣＣＬＭ（ｃｒｏｓｓ－ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ　ｌｉｎｅａｒ　ｍｏｄｅｌ）予測と呼ばれることがある。このような輝度ブロックを参照する色差ブロックのイントラ予測モード（例えばＣＣＬＭモードと呼ばれる）は、色差ブロックのイントラ予測モードの１つとして加えられてもよい。 Note that a luminance block may be referred to in intra prediction of a chrominance block. That is, the chrominance component of the current block may be predicted based on the luminance component of the current block. Such intra prediction may be referred to as cross-component linear model (CCLM) prediction. The intra prediction mode (for example, referred to as a CCLM mode) of a chrominance block referencing such a luminance block may be added as one of the intra prediction modes of the chrominance block.
　イントラ予測部１２４は、水平／垂直方向の参照画素の勾配に基づいてイントラ予測後の画素値を補正してもよい。このような補正をともなうイントラ予測は、ＰＤＰＣ（ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ　ｄｅｐｅｎｄｅｎｔ　ｉｎｔｒａ　ｐｒｅｄｉｃｔｉｏｎ　ｃｏｍｂｉｎａｔｉｏｎ）と呼ばれることがある。ＰＤＰＣの適用の有無を示す情報（例えばＰＤＰＣフラグと呼ばれる）は、例えばＣＵレベルで信号化される。なお、この情報の信号化は、ＣＵレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル（例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル又はＣＴＵレベル）であってもよい。 The intra prediction unit 124 may correct the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of the reference pixel in the horizontal / vertical directions. Intra prediction with such correction is sometimes called position dependent intra prediction combination (PDPC). Information indicating the presence or absence of application of PDPC (for example, called a PDPC flag) is signaled, for example, at CU level. Note that the signaling of this information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level or CTU level).
　［インター予測部］
　インター予測部１２６は、フレームメモリ１２２に格納された参照ピクチャであってカレントピクチャとは異なる参照ピクチャを参照してカレントブロックのインター予測（画面間予測ともいう）を行うことで、予測信号（インター予測信号）を生成する。インター予測は、カレントブロック又はカレントブロック内のサブブロック（例えば４ｘ４ブロック）の単位で行われる。例えば、インター予測部１２６は、カレントブロック又はサブブロックについて参照ピクチャ内で動き探索（ｍｏｔｉｏｎ　ｅｓｔｉｍａｔｉｏｎ）を行う。そして、インター予測部１２６は、動き探索により得られた動き情報（例えば動きベクトル）を用いて動き補償を行うことでカレントブロック又はサブブロックのインター予測信号を生成する。そして、インター予測部１２６は、生成されたインター予測信号を予測制御部１２８に出力する。 [Inter prediction unit]
The inter prediction unit 126 performs inter prediction (also referred to as inter-frame prediction) of a current block with reference to a reference picture that is a reference picture stored in the frame memory 122 and that is different from the current picture. Generate a prediction signal). Inter prediction is performed in units of a current block or sub blocks (for example, 4 × 4 blocks) in the current block. For example, the inter prediction unit 126 performs motion estimation on the current block or sub block in the reference picture. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) obtained by the motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 126 outputs the generated inter prediction signal to the prediction control unit 128.
　動き補償に用いられた動き情報は信号化される。動きベクトルの信号化には、予測動きベクトル（ｍｏｔｉｏｎ　ｖｅｃｔｏｒ　ｐｒｅｄｉｃｔｏｒ）が用いられてもよい。つまり、動きベクトルと予測動きベクトルとの間の差分が信号化されてもよい。 The motion information used for motion compensation is signaled. A motion vector predictor may be used to signal the motion vector. That is, the difference between the motion vector and the predicted motion vector may be signaled.
　なお、動き探索により得られたカレントブロックの動き情報だけでなく、隣接ブロックの動き情報も用いて、インター予測信号が生成されてもよい。具体的には、動き探索により得られた動き情報に基づく予測信号と、隣接ブロックの動き情報に基づく予測信号と、を重み付け加算することにより、カレントブロック内のサブブロック単位でインター予測信号が生成されてもよい。このようなインター予測（動き補償）は、ＯＢＭＣ（ｏｖｅｒｌａｐｐｅｄ　ｂｌｏｃｋ　ｍｏｔｉｏｎ　ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ）と呼ばれることがある。 Note that the inter prediction signal may be generated using not only the motion information of the current block obtained by the motion search but also the motion information of the adjacent block. Specifically, the inter prediction signal is generated in units of sub blocks in the current block by weighting and adding a prediction signal based on motion information obtained by motion search and a prediction signal based on motion information of an adjacent block. It may be done. Such inter prediction (motion compensation) may be called OBMC (overlapped block motion compensation).
　このようなＯＢＭＣモードでは、ＯＢＭＣのためのサブブロックのサイズを示す情報（例えばＯＢＭＣブロックサイズと呼ばれる）は、シーケンスレベルで信号化される。また、ＯＢＭＣモードを適用するか否かを示す情報（例えばＯＢＭＣフラグと呼ばれる）は、ＣＵレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化のレベルは、シーケンスレベル及びＣＵレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル（例えばピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、ＣＴＵレベル又はサブブロックレベル）であってもよい。 In such OBMC mode, information indicating the size of sub-blocks for OBMC (for example, called OBMC block size) is signaled at the sequence level. Also, information indicating whether or not to apply the OBMC mode (for example, called an OBMC flag) is signaled at the CU level. Note that the level of signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the sequence level and the CU level, and may be other levels (eg, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or subblock level) Good.
　ＯＢＭＣモードについて、より具体的に説明する。図５Ｂ及び図５Ｃは、ＯＢＭＣ処理による予測画像補正処理の概要を説明するためのフローチャート及び概念図である。 The OBMC mode will be described more specifically. FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C are a flowchart and a conceptual diagram for explaining an outline of predicted image correction processing by OBMC processing.
　まず、符号化対象ブロックに割り当てられた動きベクトル（ＭＶ）を用いて通常の動き補償による予測画像（Ｐｒｅｄ）を取得する。 First, a predicted image (Pred) by normal motion compensation is acquired using the motion vector (MV) assigned to the encoding target block.
　次に、符号化済みの左隣接ブロックの動きベクトル（ＭＶ＿Ｌ）を符号化対象ブロックに適用して予測画像（Ｐｒｅｄ＿Ｌ）を取得し、前記予測画像とＰｒｅｄ＿Ｌとを重みを付けて重ね合わせることで予測画像の１回目の補正を行う。 Next, the motion vector (MV_L) of the encoded left adjacent block is applied to the current block to obtain a predicted image (Pred_L), and the predicted image and Pred_L are weighted and superimposed. Perform the first correction of the image.
　同様に、符号化済みの上隣接ブロックの動きベクトル（ＭＶ＿Ｕ）を符号化対象ブロックに適用して予測画像（Ｐｒｅｄ＿Ｕ）を取得し、前記１回目の補正を行った予測画像とＰｒｅｄ＿Ｕとを重みを付けて重ね合わせることで予測画像の２回目の補正を行い、それを最終的な予測画像とする。 Similarly, the motion vector (MV_U) of the encoded upper adjacent block is applied to the coding target block to obtain a predicted image (Pred_U), and the predicted image subjected to the first correction and the Pred_U are weighted. A second correction of the predicted image is performed by adding and superposing, and this is made a final predicted image.
　なお、ここでは左隣接ブロックと上隣接ブロックを用いた２段階の補正の方法を説明したが、右隣接ブロックや下隣接ブロックを用いて２段階よりも多い回数の補正を行う構成とすることも可能である。 Although the two-step correction method using the left adjacent block and the upper adjacent block has been described here, the right adjacent block and the lower adjacent block may be used to perform correction more than two steps. It is possible.
　なお、重ね合わせを行う領域はブロック全体の画素領域ではなく、ブロック境界近傍の一部の領域のみであってもよい。 The area to be superimposed may not be the pixel area of the entire block, but only a partial area near the block boundary.
　なお、ここでは１枚の参照ピクチャからの予測画像補正処理について説明したが、複数枚の参照ピクチャから予測画像を補正する場合も同様であり、各々の参照ピクチャから補正した予測画像を取得した後に、得られた予測画像をさらに重ね合わせることで最終的な予測画像とする。 Although the predicted image correction processing from one reference picture has been described here, the same applies to the case where a predicted image is corrected from a plurality of reference pictures, and after obtaining a corrected predicted image from each reference picture The final predicted image is obtained by further superimposing the obtained predicted images.
　なお、前記処理対象ブロックは、予測ブロック単位であっても、予測ブロックをさらに分割したサブブロック単位であってもよい。 The processing target block may be a prediction block unit or a sub block unit obtained by further dividing the prediction block.
　ＯＢＭＣ処理を適用するかどうかの判定の方法として、例えば、ＯＢＭＣ処理を適用するかどうかを示す信号であるｏｂｍｃ＿ｆｌａｇを用いる方法がある。具体的な一例としては、符号化装置において、符号化対象ブロックが動きの複雑な領域に属しているかどうかを判定し、動きの複雑な領域に属している場合はｏｂｍｃ＿ｆｌａｇとして値１を設定してＯＢＭＣ処理を適用して符号化を行い、動きの複雑な領域に属していない場合はｏｂｍｃ＿ｆｌａｇとして値０を設定してＯＢＭＣ処理を適用せずに符号化を行う。一方、復号化装置では、ストリームに記述されたｏｂｍｃ＿ｆｌａｇを復号化することで、その値に応じてＯＢＭＣ処理を適用するかどうかを切替えて復号化を行う。 As a method of determining whether to apply the OBMC process, for example, there is a method using obmc_flag which is a signal indicating whether to apply the OBMC process. As a specific example, in the encoding apparatus, it is determined whether the encoding target block belongs to a complex area of motion, and if it belongs to a complex area of motion, the value 1 is set as obmc_flag. The encoding is performed by applying the OBMC processing, and when not belonging to the complex region of motion, the value 0 is set as the obmc_flag and the encoding is performed without applying the OBMC processing. On the other hand, the decoding apparatus decodes the obmc_flag described in the stream, and switches whether to apply the OBMC process according to the value to perform decoding.
　なお、動き情報は信号化されずに、復号装置側で導出されてもよい。例えば、Ｈ．２６５／ＨＥＶＣ規格で規定されたマージモードが用いられてもよい。また例えば、復号装置側で動き探索を行うことにより動き情報が導出されてもよい。この場合、カレントブロックの画素値を用いずに動き探索が行われる。 The motion information may be derived on the decoding device side without being signalized. For example, H. The merge mode defined in the H.265 / HEVC standard may be used. Also, for example, motion information may be derived by performing motion search on the decoding device side. In this case, motion search is performed without using the pixel value of the current block.
　ここで、復号装置側で動き探索を行うモードについて説明する。この復号装置側で動き探索を行うモードは、ＰＭＭＶＤ（ｐａｔｔｅｒｎ　ｍａｔｃｈｅｄ　ｍｏｔｉｏｎ　ｖｅｃｔｏｒ　ｄｅｒｉｖａｔｉｏｎ）モード又はＦＲＵＣ（ｆｒａｍｅ　ｒａｔｅ　ｕｐ－ｃｏｎｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ）モードと呼ばれることがある。 Here, a mode in which motion estimation is performed on the decoding device side will be described. The mode in which motion estimation is performed on the side of the decoding apparatus may be referred to as a pattern matched motion vector derivation (PMMVD) mode or a frame rate up-conversion (FRUC) mode.
　ＦＲＵＣ処理の一例を図５Ｄに示す。まず、カレントブロックに空間的又は時間的に隣接する符号化済みブロックの動きベクトルを参照して、各々が予測動きベクトルを有する複数の候補のリスト（マージリストと共通であってもよい）が生成される。次に、候補リストに登録されている複数の候補ＭＶの中からベスト候補ＭＶを選択する。例えば、候補リストに含まれる各候補の評価値が算出され、評価値に基づいて１つの候補が選択される。 An example of the FRUC process is shown in FIG. 5D. First, referring to motion vectors of encoded blocks spatially or temporally adjacent to the current block, a plurality of candidate lists (which may be common to the merge list) each having a predicted motion vector are generated Be done. Next, the best candidate MV is selected from among the plurality of candidate MVs registered in the candidate list. For example, an evaluation value of each candidate included in the candidate list is calculated, and one candidate is selected based on the evaluation value.
　そして、選択された候補の動きベクトルに基づいて、カレントブロックのための動きベクトルが導出される。具体的には、例えば、選択された候補の動きベクトル（ベスト候補ＭＶ）がそのままカレントブロックのための動きベクトルとして導出される。また例えば、選択された候補の動きベクトルに対応する参照ピクチャ内の位置の周辺領域において、パターンマッチングを行うことにより、カレントブロックのための動きベクトルが導出されてもよい。すなわち、ベスト候補ＭＶの周辺の領域に対して同様の方法で探索を行い、さらに評価値が良い値となるＭＶがあった場合は、ベスト候補ＭＶを前記ＭＶに更新して、それをカレントブロックの最終的なＭＶとしてもよい。なお、当該処理を実施しない構成とすることも可能である。 Then, a motion vector for the current block is derived based on the selected candidate motion vector. Specifically, for example, the selected candidate motion vector (best candidate MV) is derived as it is as the motion vector for the current block. Also, for example, a motion vector for the current block may be derived by performing pattern matching in a peripheral region of a position in the reference picture corresponding to the selected candidate motion vector. That is, the search is performed on the area around the best candidate MV by the same method, and if there is an MV for which the evaluation value is good, the best candidate MV is updated to the MV and the current block is updated. It may be used as the final MV. In addition, it is also possible to set it as the structure which does not implement the said process.
　サブブロック単位で処理を行う場合も全く同様の処理としてもよい。 When processing is performed in units of subblocks, the same processing may be performed.
　なお、評価値は、動きベクトルに対応する参照ピクチャ内の領域と、所定の領域との間のパターンマッチングによって再構成画像の差分値を求めることにより算出される。なお、差分値に加えてそれ以外の情報を用いて評価値を算出してもよい。 The evaluation value is calculated by calculating the difference value of the reconstructed image by pattern matching between the area in the reference picture corresponding to the motion vector and the predetermined area. Note that the evaluation value may be calculated using information other than the difference value.
　パターンマッチングとしては、第１パターンマッチング又は第２パターンマッチングが用いられる。第１パターンマッチング及び第２パターンマッチングは、それぞれ、バイラテラルマッチング（ｂｉｌａｔｅｒａｌ　ｍａｔｃｈｉｎｇ）及びテンプレートマッチング（ｔｅｍｐｌａｔｅ　ｍａｔｃｈｉｎｇ）と呼ばれることがある。 As pattern matching, first pattern matching or second pattern matching is used. The first pattern matching and the second pattern matching may be referred to as bilateral matching and template matching, respectively.
　第１パターンマッチングでは、異なる２つの参照ピクチャ内の２つのブロックであってカレントブロックの動き軌道（ｍｏｔｉｏｎ　ｔｒａｊｅｃｔｏｒｙ）に沿う２つのブロックの間でパターンマッチングが行われる。したがって、第１パターンマッチングでは、上述した候補の評価値の算出のための所定の領域として、カレントブロックの動き軌道に沿う他の参照ピクチャ内の領域が用いられる。 In the first pattern matching, pattern matching is performed between two blocks in two different reference pictures, which are along the motion trajectory of the current block. Therefore, in the first pattern matching, a region in another reference picture along the motion trajectory of the current block is used as the predetermined region for calculation of the evaluation value of the candidate described above.
　図６は、動き軌道に沿う２つのブロック間でのパターンマッチング（バイラテラルマッチング）の一例を説明するための図である。図６に示すように、第１パターンマッチングでは、カレントブロック（Ｃｕｒ　ｂｌｏｃｋ）の動き軌道に沿う２つのブロックであって異なる２つの参照ピクチャ（Ｒｅｆ０、Ｒｅｆ１）内の２つのブロックのペアの中で最もマッチするペアを探索することにより２つの動きベクトル（ＭＶ０、ＭＶ１）が導出される。具体的には、カレントブロックに対して、候補ＭＶで指定された第１の符号化済み参照ピクチャ（Ｒｅｆ０）内の指定位置における再構成画像と、前記候補ＭＶを表示時間間隔でスケーリングした対称ＭＶで指定された第２の符号化済み参照ピクチャ（Ｒｅｆ１）内の指定位置における再構成画像との差分を導出し、得られた差分値を用いて評価値を算出する。複数の候補ＭＶの中で最も評価値が良い値となる候補ＭＶを最終ＭＶとして選択するとよい。 FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (bilateral matching) between two blocks along a motion trajectory. As shown in FIG. 6, in the first pattern matching, among pairs of two blocks in two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1) which are two blocks along the motion trajectory of the current block (Cur block), Two motion vectors (MV0, MV1) are derived by searching for the most matching pair. Specifically, for the current block, a reconstructed image at a designated position in the first encoded reference picture (Ref 0) designated by the candidate MV, and a symmetric MV obtained by scaling the candidate MV at a display time interval. The difference with the reconstructed image at the specified position in the second coded reference picture (Ref 1) specified in step is derived, and the evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value. The candidate MV with the best evaluation value among the plurality of candidate MVs may be selected as the final MV.
　連続的な動き軌道の仮定の下では、２つの参照ブロックを指し示す動きベクトル（ＭＶ０、ＭＶ１）は、カレントピクチャ（Ｃｕｒ　Ｐｉｃ）と２つの参照ピクチャ（Ｒｅｆ０、Ｒｅｆ１）との間の時間的な距離（ＴＤ０、ＴＤ１）に対して比例する。例えば、カレントピクチャが時間的に２つの参照ピクチャの間に位置し、カレントピクチャから２つの参照ピクチャへの時間的な距離が等しい場合、第１パターンマッチングでは、鏡映対称な双方向の動きベクトルが導出される。 Under the assumption of continuous motion trajectory, motion vectors (MV0, MV1) pointing to two reference blocks are the temporal distance between the current picture (Cur Pic) and the two reference pictures (Ref0, Ref1) It is proportional to (TD0, TD1). For example, when the current picture is temporally located between two reference pictures, and the temporal distances from the current picture to the two reference pictures are equal, in the first pattern matching, the mirror symmetric bi-directional motion vector Is derived.
　第２パターンマッチングでは、カレントピクチャ内のテンプレート（カレントピクチャ内でカレントブロックに隣接するブロック（例えば上及び／又は左隣接ブロック））と参照ピクチャ内のブロックとの間でパターンマッチングが行われる。したがって、第２パターンマッチングでは、上述した候補の評価値の算出のための所定の領域として、カレントピクチャ内のカレントブロックに隣接するブロックが用いられる。 In the second pattern matching, pattern matching is performed between a template in the current picture (a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture (eg, upper and / or left adjacent blocks)) and a block in the reference picture. Therefore, in the second pattern matching, a block adjacent to the current block in the current picture is used as the predetermined area for calculating the evaluation value of the candidate described above.
　図７は、カレントピクチャ内のテンプレートと参照ピクチャ内のブロックとの間でのパターンマッチング（テンプレートマッチング）の一例を説明するための図である。図７に示すように、第２パターンマッチングでは、カレントピクチャ（Ｃｕｒ　Ｐｉｃ）内でカレントブロック（Ｃｕｒ　ｂｌｏｃｋ）に隣接するブロックと最もマッチするブロックを参照ピクチャ（Ｒｅｆ０）内で探索することによりカレントブロックの動きベクトルが導出される。具体的には、カレントブロックに対して、左隣接および上隣接の両方もしくはどちらか一方の符号化済み領域の再構成画像と、候補ＭＶで指定された符号化済み参照ピクチャ（Ｒｅｆ０）内の同等位置における再構成画像との差分を導出し、得られた差分値を用いて評価値を算出し、複数の候補ＭＶの中で最も評価値が良い値となる候補ＭＶをベスト候補ＭＶとして選択するとよい。 FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of pattern matching (template matching) between a template in a current picture and a block in a reference picture. As shown in FIG. 7, in the second pattern matching, the current block (Cur Pic) is searched for in the reference picture (Ref 0) for a block that most closely matches a block adjacent to the current block (Cur block). Motion vectors are derived. Specifically, for the current block, the reconstructed image of the left adjacent region and / or the upper adjacent encoded region and the encoded reference picture (Ref 0) specified by the candidate MV are equivalent to each other. When the difference between the position and the reconstructed image is derived, the evaluation value is calculated using the obtained difference value, and the candidate MV having the best evaluation value among the plurality of candidate MVs is selected as the best candidate MV Good.
　このようなＦＲＵＣモードを適用するか否かを示す情報（例えばＦＲＵＣフラグと呼ばれる）は、ＣＵレベルで信号化される。また、ＦＲＵＣモードが適用される場合（例えばＦＲＵＣフラグが真の場合）、パターンマッチングの方法（第１パターンマッチング又は第２パターンマッチング）を示す情報（例えばＦＲＵＣモードフラグと呼ばれる）がＣＵレベルで信号化される。なお、これらの情報の信号化は、ＣＵレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル（例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、ＣＴＵレベル又はサブブロックレベル）であってもよい。 Information indicating whether to apply such a FRUC mode (for example, called a FRUC flag) is signaled at the CU level. In addition, when the FRUC mode is applied (for example, when the FRUC flag is true), a signal (for example, called a FRUC mode flag) indicating a method of pattern matching (for example, first pattern matching or second pattern matching) is a signal at CU level Be Note that the signaling of these pieces of information need not be limited to the CU level, but may be at other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or subblock level) .
　ここで、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルに基づいて動きベクトルを導出するモードについて説明する。このモードは、ＢＩＯ（ｂｉ－ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎａｌ　ｏｐｔｉｃａｌ　ｆｌｏｗ）モードと呼ばれることがある。 Here, a mode for deriving a motion vector based on a model assuming uniform linear motion will be described. This mode is sometimes referred to as a bi-directional optical flow (BIO) mode.
　図８は、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルを説明するための図である。図８において、（ｖｘ，ｖｙ）は、速度ベクトルを示し、τ０、τ１は、それぞれ、カレントピクチャ（Ｃｕｒ　Ｐｉｃ）と２つの参照ピクチャ（Ｒｅｆ０，Ｒｅｆ１）との間の時間的な距離を示す。（ＭＶｘ０，ＭＶｙ０）は、参照ピクチャＲｅｆ０に対応する動きベクトルを示し、（ＭＶｘ１、ＭＶｙ１）は、参照ピクチャＲｅｆ１に対応する動きベクトルを示す。 FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a model assuming uniform linear motion. In FIG. 8, (v x , v y ) indicate velocity vectors, and τ 0 and τ 1 indicate the time between the current picture (Cur Pic) and two reference pictures (Ref 0 and Ref 1 ), respectively. Indicate the distance. (MVx 0 , MVy 0 ) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref 0 , and (MVx 1 , MVy 1 ) indicates a motion vector corresponding to the reference picture Ref 1 .
　このとき速度ベクトル（ｖｘ，ｖｙ）の等速直線運動の仮定の下では、（ＭＶｘ０，ＭＶｙ０）及び（ＭＶｘ１，ＭＶｙ１）は、それぞれ、（ｖｘτ０，ｖｙτ０）及び（－ｖｘτ１，－ｖｙτ１）と表され、以下のオプティカルフロー等式（１）が成り立つ。 At this time, under the assumption of uniform linear motion of the velocity vector (v x , v y ), (MV x 0 , MV y 0 ) and (MV x 1 , MV y 1 ) respectively represent (v x τ 0 , v y τ 0 ) and (-v x τ 1 , -v y τ 1 ), the following optical flow equation (1) holds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000001
　ここで、Ｉ（ｋ）は、動き補償後の参照画像ｋ（ｋ＝０，１）の輝度値を示す。このオプティカルフロー等式は、（i）輝度値の時間微分と、（ii）水平方向の速度及び参照画像の空間勾配の水平成分の積と、（iii）垂直方向の速度及び参照画像の空間勾配の垂直成分の積と、の和が、ゼロと等しいことを示す。このオプティカルフロー等式とエルミート補間（Ｈｅｒｍｉｔｅ　ｉｎｔｅｒｐｏｌａｔｉｏｎ）との組み合わせに基づいて、マージリスト等から得られるブロック単位の動きベクトルが画素単位で補正される。 Here, I (k) represents the luminance value of the reference image k (k = 0, 1) after motion compensation. The optical flow equation is: (i) the time derivative of the luminance value, (ii) the product of the horizontal velocity and the horizontal component of the spatial gradient of the reference image, and (iii) the vertical velocity and the spatial gradient of the reference image Indicates that the product of the vertical components of and the sum of is equal to zero. Based on the combination of the optical flow equation and Hermite interpolation, a motion vector in units of blocks obtained from a merge list or the like is corrected in units of pixels.
　なお、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルに基づく動きベクトルの導出とは異なる方法で、復号装置側で動きベクトルが導出されてもよい。例えば、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてサブブロック単位で動きベクトルが導出されてもよい。 Note that the motion vector may be derived on the decoding device side by a method different from the derivation of the motion vector based on a model assuming uniform linear motion. For example, motion vectors may be derived on a subblock basis based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks.
　ここで、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてサブブロック単位で動きベクトルを導出するモードについて説明する。このモードは、アフィン動き補償予測（ａｆｆｉｎｅ　ｍｏｔｉｏｎ　ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ　ｐｒｅｄｉｃｔｉｏｎ）モードと呼ばれることがある。 Here, a mode for deriving a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks will be described. This mode is sometimes referred to as affine motion compensation prediction mode.
　図９Ａは、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づくサブブロック単位の動きベクトルの導出を説明するための図である。図９Ａにおいて、カレントブロックは、１６の４ｘ４サブブロックを含む。ここでは、隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてカレントブロックの左上角制御ポイントの動きベクトルｖ０が導出され、隣接サブブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてカレントブロックの右上角制御ポイントの動きベクトルｖ１が導出される。そして、２つの動きベクトルｖ０及びｖ１を用いて、以下の式（２）により、カレントブロック内の各サブブロックの動きベクトル（ｖｘ，ｖｙ）が導出される。 FIG. 9A is a diagram for describing derivation of a motion vector in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. In FIG. 9A, the current block includes sixteen 4 × 4 subblocks. Here, the motion vector v 0 of the upper left corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent block, and the motion vector v 1 of the upper right corner control point of the current block is derived based on the motion vector of the adjacent subblock Be done. Then, using the two motion vectors v 0 and v 1 , the motion vector (v x , v y ) of each sub block in the current block is derived according to the following equation (2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000002
　ここで、ｘ及びｙは、それぞれ、サブブロックの水平位置及び垂直位置を示し、ｗは、予め定められた重み係数を示す。 Here, x and y indicate the horizontal position and the vertical position of the sub block, respectively, and w indicates a predetermined weighting factor.
　このようなアフィン動き補償予測モードでは、左上及び右上角制御ポイントの動きベクトルの導出方法が異なるいくつかのモードを含んでもよい。このようなアフィン動き補償予測モードを示す情報（例えばアフィンフラグと呼ばれる）は、ＣＵレベルで信号化される。なお、このアフィン動き補償予測モードを示す情報の信号化は、ＣＵレベルに限定される必要はなく、他のレベル（例えば、シーケンスレベル、ピクチャレベル、スライスレベル、タイルレベル、ＣＴＵレベル又はサブブロックレベル）であってもよい。 In such an affine motion compensation prediction mode, the derivation method of the motion vector of the upper left and upper right control points may include several different modes. Information indicating such an affine motion compensation prediction mode (for example, called an affine flag) is signaled at the CU level. Note that the signaling of the information indicating this affine motion compensation prediction mode need not be limited to the CU level, and other levels (eg, sequence level, picture level, slice level, tile level, CTU level or subblock level) ) May be.
　［予測制御部］
　予測制御部１２８は、イントラ予測信号及びインター予測信号のいずれかを選択し、選択した信号を予測信号として減算部１０４及び加算部１１６に出力する。 [Prediction control unit]
The prediction control unit 128 selects one of the intra prediction signal and the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal as a prediction signal to the subtraction unit 104 and the addition unit 116.
　ここで、マージモードにより符号化対象ピクチャの動きベクトルを導出する例を説明する。図９Ｂは、マージモードによる動きベクトル導出処理の概要を説明するための図である。 Here, an example in which the motion vector of the current picture to be encoded is derived by the merge mode will be described. FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing an overview of motion vector derivation processing in the merge mode.
　まず、予測ＭＶの候補を登録した予測ＭＶリストを生成する。予測ＭＶの候補としては、符号化対象ブロックの空間的に周辺に位置する複数の符号化済みブロックが持つＭＶである空間隣接予測ＭＶ、符号化済み参照ピクチャにおける符号化対象ブロックの位置を投影した近辺のブロックが持つＭＶである時間隣接予測ＭＶ、空間隣接予測ＭＶと時間隣接予測ＭＶのＭＶ値を組合わせて生成したＭＶである結合予測ＭＶ、および値がゼロのＭＶであるゼロ予測ＭＶ等がある。 First, a predicted MV list in which candidates for predicted MV are registered is generated. As the prediction MV candidate, the position of the coding target block in the coded reference picture, which is the MV of the plurality of coded blocks located in the spatial periphery of the coding target block, is projected Temporally adjacent prediction MV which is an MV possessed by a nearby block, joint prediction MV which is an MV generated by combining spatially adjacent prediction MV and MVs of temporally adjacent prediction MV, and zero prediction MV whose value is MV, etc. There is.
　次に、予測ＭＶリストに登録されている複数の予測ＭＶの中から１つの予測ＭＶを選択することで、符号化対象ブロックのＭＶとして決定する。 Next, one prediction MV is selected from among the plurality of prediction MVs registered in the prediction MV list, and it is determined as the MV of the current block.
　さらに可変長符号化部では、どの予測ＭＶを選択したかを示す信号であるｍｅｒｇｅ＿ｉｄｘをストリームに記述して符号化する。 Furthermore, in the variable-length coding unit, merge_idx, which is a signal indicating which prediction MV has been selected, is described in the stream and encoded.
　なお、図９Ｂで説明した予測ＭＶリストに登録する予測ＭＶは一例であり、図中の個数とは異なる個数であったり、図中の予測ＭＶの一部の種類を含まない構成であったり、図中の予測ＭＶの種類以外の予測ＭＶを追加した構成であったりしてもよい。 Note that the prediction MVs registered in the prediction MV list described in FIG. 9B are an example, and the number is different from the number in the drawing, or the configuration does not include some types of the prediction MV in the drawing, It may have a configuration in which prediction MVs other than the type of prediction MV in the drawing are added.
　なお、マージモードにより導出した符号化対象ブロックのＭＶを用いて、後述するＤＭＶＲ処理を行うことによって最終的なＭＶを決定してもよい。 The final MV may be determined by performing the DMVR process described later using the MV of the coding target block derived in the merge mode.
　ここで、ＤＭＶＲ処理を用いてＭＶを決定する例について説明する。 Here, an example in which the MV is determined using the DMVR process will be described.
　図９Ｃは、ＤＭＶＲ処理の概要を説明するための概念図である。 FIG. 9C is a conceptual diagram for describing an overview of DMVR processing.
　まず、処理対象ブロックに設定された最適ＭＶＰを候補ＭＶとして、前記候補ＭＶに従って、Ｌ０方向の処理済みピクチャである第１参照ピクチャ、およびＬ１方向の処理済みピクチャである第２参照ピクチャから参照画素をそれぞれ取得し、各参照画素の平均をとることでテンプレートを生成する。 First, with the optimum MVP set as the processing target block as a candidate MV, according to the candidate MV, a first reference picture which is a processed picture in the L0 direction and a second reference picture which is a processed picture in the L1 direction To generate a template by averaging each reference pixel.
　次に、前記テンプレートを用いて、第１参照ピクチャおよび第２参照ピクチャの候補ＭＶの周辺領域をそれぞれ探索し、最もコストが最小となるＭＶを最終的なＭＶとして決定する。なお、コスト値はテンプレートの各画素値と探索領域の各画素値との差分値およびＭＶ値等を用いて算出する。 Next, using the template, the regions around candidate MVs of the first reference picture and the second reference picture are respectively searched, and the MV with the lowest cost is determined as the final MV. The cost value is calculated using the difference value between each pixel value of the template and each pixel value of the search area, the MV value, and the like.
　なお、符号化装置および復号化装置では、ここで説明した処理の概要は基本的に共通である。 The outline of the process described here is basically common to the encoding apparatus and the decoding apparatus.
　なお、ここで説明した処理そのものでなくても、候補ＭＶの周辺を探索して最終的なＭＶを導出することができる処理であれば、他の処理を用いてもよい。 Note that even if the process is not a process described here, another process may be used as long as the process can search for the periphery of the candidate MV and derive a final MV.
　ここで、ＬＩＣ処理を用いて予測画像を生成するモードについて説明する。 Here, a mode in which a predicted image is generated using LIC processing will be described.
　図９Ｄは、ＬＩＣ処理による輝度補正処理を用いた予測画像生成方法の概要を説明するための図である。 FIG. 9D is a diagram for describing an outline of a predicted image generation method using luminance correction processing by LIC processing.
　まず、符号化済みピクチャである参照ピクチャから符号化対象ブロックに対応する参照画像を取得するためのＭＶを導出する。 First, an MV for obtaining a reference image corresponding to a current block to be coded is derived from a reference picture which is a coded picture.
　次に、符号化対象ブロックに対して、左隣接および上隣接の符号化済み周辺参照領域の輝度画素値と、ＭＶで指定された参照ピクチャ内の同等位置における輝度画素値とを用いて、参照ピクチャと符号化対象ピクチャとで輝度値がどのように変化したかを示す情報を抽出して輝度補正パラメータを算出する。 Next, for the block to be encoded, reference is made using the luminance pixel values of the left adjacent and upper adjacent encoded peripheral reference areas and the luminance pixel values at equivalent positions in the reference picture specified by MV. Information indicating how the luminance value has changed between the picture and the picture to be encoded is extracted to calculate a luminance correction parameter.
　ＭＶで指定された参照ピクチャ内の参照画像に対して前記輝度補正パラメータを用いて輝度補正処理を行うことで、符号化対象ブロックに対する予測画像を生成する。 By performing luminance correction processing on a reference image in a reference picture designated by MV using the luminance correction parameter, a predicted image for a block to be encoded is generated.
　なお、図９Ｄにおける前記周辺参照領域の形状は一例であり、これ以外の形状を用いてもよい。 The shape of the peripheral reference area in FIG. 9D is an example, and other shapes may be used.
　また、ここでは１枚の参照ピクチャから予測画像を生成する処理について説明したが、複数枚の参照ピクチャから予測画像を生成する場合も同様であり、各々の参照ピクチャから取得した参照画像に同様の方法で輝度補正処理を行ってから予測画像を生成する。 Further, although the process of generating a predicted image from one reference picture has been described here, the same applies to a case where a predicted image is generated from a plurality of reference pictures, and is similar to the reference image acquired from each reference picture. After performing luminance correction processing by a method, a predicted image is generated.
　ＬＩＣ処理を適用するかどうかの判定の方法として、例えば、ＬＩＣ処理を適用するかどうかを示す信号であるｌｉｃ＿ｆｌａｇを用いる方法がある。具体的な一例としては、符号化装置において、符号化対象ブロックが輝度変化が発生している領域に属しているかどうかを判定し、輝度変化が発生している領域に属している場合はｌｉｃ＿ｆｌａｇとして値１を設定してＬＩＣ処理を適用して符号化を行い、輝度変化が発生している領域に属していない場合はｌｉｃ＿ｆｌａｇとして値０を設定してＬＩＣ処理を適用せずに符号化を行う。一方、復号化装置では、ストリームに記述されたｌｉｃ＿ｆｌａｇを復号化することで、その値に応じてＬＩＣ処理を適用するかどうかを切替えて復号化を行う。 As a method of determining whether to apply the LIC process, for example, there is a method using lic_flag which is a signal indicating whether to apply the LIC process. As a specific example, in the encoding apparatus, it is determined whether or not the encoding target block belongs to the area in which the luminance change occurs, and when it belongs to the area in which the luminance change occurs, as lic_flag A value of 1 is set and encoding is performed by applying LIC processing, and when not belonging to an area where a luminance change occurs, a value of 0 is set as lic_flag and encoding is performed without applying the LIC processing. . On the other hand, the decoding apparatus decodes lic_flag described in the stream to switch whether to apply the LIC processing according to the value and performs decoding.
　ＬＩＣ処理を適用するかどうかの判定の別の方法として、例えば、周辺ブロックでＬＩＣ処理を適用したかどうかに従って判定する方法もある。具体的な一例としては、符号化対象ブロックがマージモードであった場合、マージモード処理におけるＭＶの導出の際に選択した周辺の符号化済みブロックがＬＩＣ処理を適用して符号化したかどうかを判定し、その結果に応じてＬＩＣ処理を適用するかどうかを切替えて符号化を行う。なお、この例の場合、復号化における処理も全く同様となる。 As another method of determining whether to apply the LIC process, for example, there is also a method of determining according to whether or not the LIC process is applied to the peripheral block. As a specific example, when the encoding target block is in merge mode, whether or not the surrounding encoded blocks selected in the derivation of the MV in merge mode processing are encoded by applying LIC processing According to the result, whether to apply the LIC process is switched to perform encoding. In the case of this example, the processing in the decoding is completely the same.
　［復号装置の概要］
　次に、上記の符号化装置１００から出力された符号化信号（符号化ビットストリーム）を復号可能な復号装置の概要について説明する。図１０は、実施の形態１に係る復号装置２００の機能構成を示すブロック図である。復号装置２００は、動画像／画像をブロック単位で復号する動画像／画像復号装置である。 [Overview of Decryption Device]
Next, an outline of a decoding apparatus capable of decoding the coded signal (coded bit stream) output from the above coding apparatus 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of decoding apparatus 200 according to Embodiment 1. The decoding device 200 is a moving image / image decoding device that decodes a moving image / image in units of blocks.
　図１０に示すように、復号装置２００は、エントロピー復号部２０２と、逆量子化部２０４と、逆変換部２０６と、加算部２０８と、ブロックメモリ２１０と、ループフィルタ部２１２と、フレームメモリ２１４と、イントラ予測部２１６と、インター予測部２１８と、予測制御部２２０と、を備える。 As shown in FIG. 10, the decoding apparatus 200 includes an entropy decoding unit 202, an inverse quantization unit 204, an inverse conversion unit 206, an addition unit 208, a block memory 210, a loop filter unit 212, and a frame memory 214. , An intra prediction unit 216, an inter prediction unit 218, and a prediction control unit 220.
　復号装置２００は、例えば、汎用プロセッサ及びメモリにより実現される。この場合、メモリに格納されたソフトウェアプログラムがプロセッサにより実行されたときに、プロセッサは、エントロピー復号部２０２、逆量子化部２０４、逆変換部２０６、加算部２０８、ループフィルタ部２１２、イントラ予測部２１６、インター予測部２１８及び予測制御部２２０として機能する。また、復号装置２００は、エントロピー復号部２０２、逆量子化部２０４、逆変換部２０６、加算部２０８、ループフィルタ部２１２、イントラ予測部２１６、インター予測部２１８及び予測制御部２２０に対応する専用の１以上の電子回路として実現されてもよい。 The decoding device 200 is realized by, for example, a general-purpose processor and a memory. In this case, when the processor executes the software program stored in the memory, the processor determines whether the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse conversion unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, the intra prediction unit 216 functions as an inter prediction unit 218 and a prediction control unit 220. In addition, the decoding apparatus 200 is a dedicated unit corresponding to the entropy decoding unit 202, the inverse quantization unit 204, the inverse conversion unit 206, the addition unit 208, the loop filter unit 212, the intra prediction unit 216, the inter prediction unit 218, and the prediction control unit 220. And one or more electronic circuits.
　以下に、復号装置２００に含まれる各構成要素について説明する。 Each component included in the decoding device 200 will be described below.
　［エントロピー復号部］
　エントロピー復号部２０２は、符号化ビットストリームをエントロピー復号する。具体的には、エントロピー復号部２０２は、例えば、符号化ビットストリームから二値信号に算術復号する。そして、エントロピー復号部２０２は、二値信号を多値化（ｄｅｂｉｎａｒｉｚｅ）する。これにより、エントロピー復号部２０２は、ブロック単位で量子化係数を逆量子化部２０４に出力する。 [Entropy decoder]
The entropy decoding unit 202 entropy decodes the coded bit stream. Specifically, the entropy decoding unit 202 performs arithmetic decoding, for example, from a coded bit stream to a binary signal. Then, the entropy decoding unit 202 debinarizes the binary signal. Thereby, the entropy decoding unit 202 outputs the quantization coefficient to the dequantization unit 204 in block units.
　［逆量子化部］
　逆量子化部２０４は、エントロピー復号部２０２からの入力である復号対象ブロック（以下、カレントブロックという）の量子化係数を逆量子化する。具体的には、逆量子化部２０４は、カレントブロックの量子化係数の各々について、当該量子化係数に対応する量子化パラメータに基づいて当該量子化係数を逆量子化する。そして、逆量子化部２０４は、カレントブロックの逆量子化された量子化係数（つまり変換係数）を逆変換部２０６に出力する。 [Inverse quantization unit]
The inverse quantization unit 204 inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient of the block to be decoded (hereinafter referred to as a current block), which is an input from the entropy decoding unit 202. Specifically, the dequantization part 204 dequantizes the said quantization coefficient about each of the quantization coefficient of a current block based on the quantization parameter corresponding to the said quantization coefficient. Then, the dequantization unit 204 outputs the dequantized quantization coefficient (that is, transform coefficient) of the current block to the inverse transformation unit 206.
　［逆変換部］
　逆変換部２０６は、逆量子化部２０４からの入力である変換係数を逆変換することにより予測誤差を復元する。 [Inverse converter]
The inverse transform unit 206 restores the prediction error by inversely transforming the transform coefficient that is the input from the inverse quantization unit 204.
　例えば符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がＥＭＴ又はＡＭＴを適用することを示す場合（例えばＡＭＴフラグが真）、逆変換部２０６は、読み解かれた変換タイプを示す情報に基づいてカレントブロックの変換係数を逆変換する。 For example, when the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the EMT or AMT is applied (for example, the AMT flag is true), the inverse transform unit 206 determines the current block based on the deciphered transformation type information. Inverse transform coefficients of
　また例えば、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がＮＳＳＴを適用することを示す場合、逆変換部２０６は、変換係数に逆再変換を適用する。 Also, for example, when the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the NSST is to be applied, the inverse transform unit 206 applies inverse retransformation to the transform coefficients.
　［加算部］
　加算部２０８は、逆変換部２０６からの入力である予測誤差と予測制御部２２０からの入力である予測サンプルとを加算することによりカレントブロックを再構成する。そして、加算部２０８は、再構成されたブロックをブロックメモリ２１０及びループフィルタ部２１２に出力する。 [Adder]
The addition unit 208 adds the prediction error, which is the input from the inverse conversion unit 206, and the prediction sample, which is the input from the prediction control unit 220, to reconstruct the current block. Then, the adding unit 208 outputs the reconstructed block to the block memory 210 and the loop filter unit 212.
　［ブロックメモリ］
　ブロックメモリ２１０は、イントラ予測で参照されるブロックであって復号対象ピクチャ（以下、カレントピクチャという）内のブロックを格納するための記憶部である。具体的には、ブロックメモリ２１０は、加算部２０８から出力された再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Block memory]
The block memory 210 is a storage unit for storing a block within a picture to be decoded (hereinafter referred to as a current picture) which is a block referred to in intra prediction. Specifically, the block memory 210 stores the reconstructed block output from the adding unit 208.
　［ループフィルタ部］
　ループフィルタ部２１２は、加算部２０８によって再構成されたブロックにループフィルタを施し、フィルタされた再構成ブロックをフレームメモリ２１４及び表示装置等に出力する。 [Loop filter section]
The loop filter unit 212 applies a loop filter to the block reconstructed by the adding unit 208, and outputs the filtered reconstructed block to the frame memory 214 and a display device or the like.
　符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれたＡＬＦのオン／オフを示す情報がＡＬＦのオンを示す場合、局所的な勾配の方向及び活性度に基づいて複数のフィルタの中から１つのフィルタが選択され、選択されたフィルタが再構成ブロックに適用される。 If the information indicating on / off of ALF read from the encoded bit stream indicates that ALF is on, one filter is selected from the plurality of filters based on the local gradient direction and activity, The selected filter is applied to the reconstruction block.
　［フレームメモリ］
　フレームメモリ２１４は、インター予測に用いられる参照ピクチャを格納するための記憶部であり、フレームバッファと呼ばれることもある。具体的には、フレームメモリ２１４は、ループフィルタ部２１２によってフィルタされた再構成ブロックを格納する。 [Frame memory]
The frame memory 214 is a storage unit for storing a reference picture used for inter prediction, and may be referred to as a frame buffer. Specifically, the frame memory 214 stores the reconstructed block filtered by the loop filter unit 212.
　［イントラ予測部］
　イントラ予測部２１６は、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれたイントラ予測モードに基づいて、ブロックメモリ２１０に格納されたカレントピクチャ内のブロックを参照してイントラ予測を行うことで、予測信号（イントラ予測信号）を生成する。具体的には、イントラ予測部２１６は、カレントブロックに隣接するブロックのサンプル（例えば輝度値、色差値）を参照してイントラ予測を行うことでイントラ予測信号を生成し、イントラ予測信号を予測制御部２２０に出力する。 [Intra prediction unit]
The intra prediction unit 216 refers to a block in the current picture stored in the block memory 210 to perform intra prediction based on the intra prediction mode read from the coded bit stream, thereby generating a prediction signal (intra prediction Signal). Specifically, the intra prediction unit 216 generates an intra prediction signal by performing intra prediction with reference to samples (for example, luminance value, color difference value) of a block adjacent to the current block, and performs prediction control on the intra prediction signal. Output to unit 220.
　なお、色差ブロックのイントラ予測において輝度ブロックを参照するイントラ予測モードが選択されている場合は、イントラ予測部２１６は、カレントブロックの輝度成分に基づいて、カレントブロックの色差成分を予測してもよい。 When the intra prediction mode that refers to the luminance block is selected in the intra prediction of the chrominance block, the intra prediction unit 216 may predict the chrominance component of the current block based on the luminance component of the current block. .
　また、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がＰＤＰＣの適用を示す場合、イントラ予測部２１６は、水平／垂直方向の参照画素の勾配に基づいてイントラ予測後の画素値を補正する。 Also, when the information read from the coded bit stream indicates the application of PDPC, the intra prediction unit 216 corrects the pixel value after intra prediction based on the gradient of reference pixels in the horizontal / vertical directions.
　［インター予測部］
　インター予測部２１８は、フレームメモリ２１４に格納された参照ピクチャを参照して、カレントブロックを予測する。予測は、カレントブロック又はカレントブロック内のサブブロック（例えば４ｘ４ブロック）の単位で行われる。例えば、インター予測部２１８は、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた動き情報（例えば動きベクトル）を用いて動き補償を行うことでカレントブロック又はサブブロックのインター予測信号を生成し、インター予測信号を予測制御部２２０に出力する。 [Inter prediction unit]
The inter prediction unit 218 predicts the current block with reference to the reference picture stored in the frame memory 214. The prediction is performed in units of the current block or subblocks (for example, 4 × 4 blocks) in the current block. For example, the inter prediction unit 218 generates an inter prediction signal of the current block or sub block by performing motion compensation using motion information (for example, a motion vector) read from the coded bit stream, and generates an inter prediction signal. It is output to the prediction control unit 220.
　なお、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がＯＢＭＣモードを適用することを示す場合、インター予測部２１８は、動き探索により得られたカレントブロックの動き情報だけでなく、隣接ブロックの動き情報も用いて、インター予測信号を生成する。 When the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the OBMC mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 determines not only the motion information of the current block obtained by the motion search but also the motion information of the adjacent block. Use to generate an inter prediction signal.
　また、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がＦＲＵＣモードを適用することを示す場合、インター予測部２１８は、符号化ストリームから読み解かれたパターンマッチングの方法（バイラテラルマッチング又はテンプレートマッチング）に従って動き探索を行うことにより動き情報を導出する。そして、インター予測部２１８は、導出された動き情報を用いて動き補償を行う。 Also, in the case where the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the FRUC mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 is configured to follow the method of pattern matching deciphered from the coded stream (bilateral matching or template matching). Motion information is derived by performing motion search. Then, the inter prediction unit 218 performs motion compensation using the derived motion information.
　また、インター予測部２１８は、ＢＩＯモードが適用される場合に、等速直線運動を仮定したモデルに基づいて動きベクトルを導出する。また、符号化ビットストリームから読み解かれた情報がアフィン動き補償予測モードを適用することを示す場合には、インター予測部２１８は、複数の隣接ブロックの動きベクトルに基づいてサブブロック単位で動きベクトルを導出する。 In addition, when the BIO mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 derives a motion vector based on a model assuming uniform linear motion. Also, in the case where the information deciphered from the coded bit stream indicates that the affine motion compensation prediction mode is applied, the inter prediction unit 218 performs motion vectors in units of sub blocks based on motion vectors of a plurality of adjacent blocks. Derive
　［予測制御部］
　予測制御部２２０は、イントラ予測信号及びインター予測信号のいずれかを選択し、選択した信号を予測信号として加算部２０８に出力する。 [Prediction control unit]
The prediction control unit 220 selects one of the intra prediction signal and the inter prediction signal, and outputs the selected signal to the addition unit 208 as a prediction signal.
　［デブロッキングフィルタ処理の第１態様］
　図１１は、符号化装置１００に含まれるループフィルタ部１２０によるデブロッキングフィルタ処理の第１態様のフローチャートである。図１１に示す処理は、隣接する２つのブロックのブロック境界毎に行われる。なお、以下では、符号化装置１００に含まれるループフィルタ部１２０の動作を主に説明するが、復号装置２００に含まれるループフィルタ部２１２の動作も同様である。 [First aspect of deblocking filter processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first aspect of the deblocking filter processing by the loop filter unit 120 included in the encoding device 100. The process shown in FIG. 11 is performed for each block boundary of two adjacent blocks. Although the operation of the loop filter unit 120 included in the encoding device 100 will be mainly described below, the operation of the loop filter unit 212 included in the decoding device 200 is also the same.
　まず、ループフィルタ部１２０は、デブロッキングフィルタ処理において、処理対象のブロック境界である対象境界の両側に位置するブロックの情報を用いてＢｓと呼ばれる値を算出する（Ｓ２０１）。次に、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓの値に応じて、対象境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行なう否かを決定する（Ｓ２０２及びＳ２０３）。 First, in the deblocking filter process, the loop filter unit 120 calculates a value called Bs using information of blocks located on both sides of a target boundary which is a target block boundary (S201). Next, in accordance with the value of Bs, the loop filter unit 120 determines whether to perform deblocking filter processing on the target boundary (S202 and S203).
　具体的には、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝２の場合には（Ｓ２０２でＹＥＳ、かつＳ２０３でＹＥＳ）、輝度及び色差の両方に対してデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行う（Ｓ２０４及びＳ２０５）。また、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝１の場合には（Ｓ２０２でＹＥＳ、かつＳ２０３でＮＯ）、輝度に対してデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行い（Ｓ２０６）、色差に対してはデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行わない。また、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝０の場合には（Ｓ２０２でＮＯ）、輝度及び色差のいずれに対してもデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行わない。 Specifically, when Bs = 2 (YES in S202 and YES in S203), the loop filter unit 120 performs deblocking filter processing on both the luminance and the color difference (S204 and S205). In addition, when Bs = 1 (YES in S202 and NO in S203), the loop filter unit 120 performs deblocking filter processing on luminance (S206), and performs deblocking filter processing on chrominance. Not performed. Further, when Bs = 0 (NO in S202), the loop filter unit 120 does not perform the deblocking filter process on any of the luminance and the color difference.
　また、図１２は、Ｂｓを算出する方法の例を示す図である。ＨＥＶＣにおけるデブロッキングフィルタ処理のＢｓ算出には、（１）境界を跨いで隣接する２つのブロックのうち少なくとも一方のブロックがイントラ予測ブロックである、（２）境界を跨いで隣接する２つのブロックのうち少なくとも一方のブロックが優位なＤＣＴ係数を含む、（３）境界を跨いで隣接する２つのブロックの動きベクトルの差分が閾値以上である、（４）境界を跨いで隣接する２つのブロックにおいて動きベクトル（ＭＶ）の本数又は参照画像が異なる、の４つの条件が用いられる。それに対して、第１態様では、（５）境界を跨いで隣接する２つのブロックのうち少なくとも一方のブロックにＬＩＣ処理を行っている、の条件が加わっている。なお、（５）境界を跨いで隣接する２つのブロックのうち少なくとも一方のブロックにＬＩＣ処理を行っている、の場合のＢｓ値は０でなければよく、１でも２でもよい。 FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs. In the Bs calculation of deblocking filter processing in HEVC, (1) at least one block of two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary is an intra prediction block, (2) two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary At least one of the blocks includes a dominant DCT coefficient, (3) the difference in motion vectors of two adjacent blocks across the boundary is equal to or greater than a threshold, (4) motion in two adjacent blocks across the boundary Four conditions are used: the number of vectors (MV) or the reference image is different. On the other hand, in the first aspect, the condition (5) that at least one of the two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary is subjected to the LIC process is added. The Bs value in the case where (5) LIC processing is performed on at least one of two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary may be either non-zero or one or two.
　図１３は、条件（５）が満たされる場合にＢｓ＝１に設定する場合のＢｓ算出処理（Ｓ２０１）のフローチャートである。図１４は、この場合のＢｓを算出する方法の例を示す図である。 FIG. 13 is a flowchart of Bs calculation processing (S201) in the case of setting Bs = 1 when the condition (5) is satisfied. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
　まず、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（１）の条件が満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２１１）。（１）の条件が満たされる場合（Ｓ２１１でＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝２に設定する（Ｓ２１３）。 First, the loop filter unit 120 determines whether the condition (1) is satisfied (S211). When the condition of (1) is satisfied (YES in S211), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 2 (S213).
　（１）の条件が満たされない場合（Ｓ２１１でＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（２）～（５）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２１２）。（２）～（５）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされる場合（Ｓ２１２でＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝１に設定する（Ｓ２１４）。（２）～（５）の条件のいずれも満たされない場合（Ｓ２１２でＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝０に設定する（Ｓ２１５）。 When the condition of (1) is not satisfied (NO in S211), the loop filter unit 120 determines whether at least one of the conditions of (2) to (5) is satisfied (S212). If at least one of the conditions (2) to (5) is satisfied (YES in S212), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 1 (S214). When none of the conditions (2) to (5) is satisfied (NO in S212), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 0 (S215).
　図１５は、条件（５）が満たされる場合にＢｓ＝２に設定する場合のＢｓ算出処理（Ｓ２０１）のフローチャートである。図１６は、この場合のＢｓを算出する方法の例を示す図である。 FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the Bs calculation process (S201) in the case of setting Bs = 2 when the condition (5) is satisfied. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
　まず、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（１）及び（５）の条件の少なくとも一方が満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２１１Ａ）。（１）及び（５）の条件の少なくとも一方が満たされる場合（Ｓ２１１ＡでＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝２に設定する（Ｓ２１３）。 First, the loop filter unit 120 determines whether at least one of the conditions (1) and (5) is satisfied (S211A). If at least one of the conditions (1) and (5) is satisfied (YES in S211A), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 2 (S213).
　（１）及び（５）の条件のいずれも満たされない場合（Ｓ２１１ＡでＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（２）～（４）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２１２Ａ）。（２）～（４）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされる場合（Ｓ２１２ＡでＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝１に設定する（Ｓ２１４）。（２）～（４）の条件のいずれも満たされない場合（Ｓ２１２ＡでＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝０に設定する（Ｓ２１５）。 When neither of the conditions (1) and (5) is satisfied (NO in S211A), the loop filter unit 120 determines whether at least one of the conditions (2) to (4) is satisfied (S212A) . If at least one of the conditions (2) to (4) is satisfied (YES in S212A), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 1 (S214). When none of the conditions (2) to (4) is satisfied (NO in S212A), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 0 (S215).
　［ＬＩＣ処理］
　ＬＩＣ処理（輝度補正処理）について図９Ｄを用いて説明したが、以下、その詳細を説明する。 [LIC processing]
Although the LIC process (brightness correction process) has been described with reference to FIG. 9D, the details thereof will be described below.
　まず、インター予測部１２６は、符号化済みピクチャである参照ピクチャから符号化対象ブロックに対応する参照画像を取得するための動きベクトルを導出する。 First, the inter prediction unit 126 derives a motion vector for obtaining a reference image corresponding to a current block to be coded from a reference picture which is a coded picture.
　次に、インター予測部１２６は、符号化対象ブロックに対して、左隣接および上隣接の符号化済み周辺参照領域の輝度画素値と、動きベクトルで指定された参照ピクチャ内の同等位置における輝度画素値とを用いて、参照ピクチャと符号化対象ピクチャとで輝度値がどのように変化したかを示す情報を抽出して輝度補正パラメータを算出する。例えば、符号化対象ピクチャ内の周辺参照領域内のある画素の輝度画素値をｐ０とし、当該画素と同等位置の、参照ピクチャ内の周辺参照領域内の画素の輝度画素値をｐ１とする。インター予測部１２６は、周辺参照領域内の複数の画素に対して、Ａ×ｐ１＋Ｂ＝ｐ０　を最適化する係数Ａ及びＢを輝度補正パラメータとして算出する。 Next, the inter prediction unit 126 determines, with respect to the current block, the luminance pixel values of the left and upper adjacent encoded peripheral reference areas and the luminance pixels at equivalent positions in the reference picture specified by the motion vector. Information indicating how the luminance value has changed between the reference picture and the encoding target picture is extracted using the value and the luminance correction parameter is calculated. For example, it is assumed that the luminance pixel value of a certain pixel in the peripheral reference region in the picture to be encoded is p0, and the luminance pixel value of the pixel in the peripheral reference region in the reference picture at the same position as the pixel is p1. The inter prediction unit 126 calculates, as luminance correction parameters, coefficients A and B for optimizing A × p 1 + B = p 0 for a plurality of pixels in the peripheral reference area.
　次に、インター予測部１２６は、動きベクトルで指定された参照ピクチャ内の参照画像に対して輝度補正パラメータを用いて輝度補正処理を行うことで、符号化対象ブロックに対する予測画像を生成する。例えば、参照画像内の輝度画素値をｐ２とし、輝度補正処理後の予測画像の輝度画素値をｐ３とする。インター予測部１２６は、参照画像内の各画素に対して、Ａ×ｐ２＋Ｂ＝ｐ３を算出することで輝度補正処理後の予測画像を生成する。 Next, the inter prediction unit 126 generates a predicted image for the coding target block by performing luminance correction processing on the reference image in the reference picture specified by the motion vector using the luminance correction parameter. For example, the luminance pixel value in the reference image is p2, and the luminance pixel value of the predicted image after the luminance correction processing is p3. The inter prediction unit 126 generates a predicted image after luminance correction processing by calculating A × p 2 + B = p 3 for each pixel in the reference image.
　なお、図９Ｄにおける周辺参照領域の形状は一例であり、これ以外の形状を用いてもよい。また、図９Ｄに示す周辺参照領域の一部が用いられてもよい。また、周辺参照領域は、符号化対象ブロックに隣接する領域に限らず、符号化対象ブロックに隣接しない領域であってもよい。また、図９Ｄに示す例では、参照ピクチャ内の周辺参照領域は、符号化対象ピクチャ内の周辺参照領域から、符号化対象ピクチャの動きベクトルで指定される領域であるが、他の動きベクトルで指定される領域であってもよい。例えば、当該他の動きベクトルは、符号化対象ピクチャ内の周辺参照領域の動きベクトルであってもよい。 The shape of the peripheral reference area in FIG. 9D is an example, and any other shape may be used. Also, a part of the peripheral reference area shown in FIG. 9D may be used. Further, the peripheral reference area is not limited to the area adjacent to the encoding target block, and may be an area not adjacent to the encoding target block. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9D, the peripheral reference area in the reference picture is an area designated by the motion vector of the encoding target picture from the peripheral reference area in the encoding target picture, but other motion vectors It may be a designated area. For example, the other motion vector may be a motion vector of a peripheral reference area in the current picture.
　なお、ここでは、符号化装置１００における動作を説明したが、復号装置２００における動作も同様である。 In addition, although the operation | movement in the encoding apparatus 100 was demonstrated here, the operation | movement in the decoding apparatus 200 is also the same.
　［第１態様の効果］
　第１態様の構成によれば、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できる可能性がある。ここで、ＬＩＣ処理が行われると、予測画像の輝度値が変化するため、再構成画像と原画との残差信号を完全に送りきれないｌｏｓｓｙ符号化が用いられる場合には、主観的にブロックノイズが目立ちやすくなる可能性がある。しかし、仮にＨＥＶＣと同様のＢｓ算出処理を行った場合、ＬＩＣ処理が行われているにも関わらずＢｓ＝０となる場合があり、デブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われない場合が存在する。本態様によりそのような状況を抑制することが可能となる。 [Effect of the first aspect]
According to the configuration of the first aspect, there is a possibility that block noise which is subjectively noticeable can be reduced. Here, when the LIC processing is performed, the luminance value of the predicted image changes, and therefore, when lossy coding that can not completely send the residual signal between the reconstructed image and the original image is used, the block is subjectively Noise may be noticeable. However, if Bs calculation processing similar to HEVC is performed, Bs may be 0 even though LIC processing is being performed, and deblocking filter processing may not be performed. This aspect can suppress such a situation.
　なお、復号装置２００に含まれるループフィルタ部２１２は、符号化装置１００に含まれるループフィルタ部１２０における上記デブロッキングフィルタ処理と同様の処理を実施する。 The loop filter unit 212 included in the decoding device 200 performs the same process as the above-described deblocking filtering process in the loop filter unit 120 included in the coding device 100.
　また、第１態様に記載した全ての処理がいつも必要とは限らず、第１態様に記載した一部の処理が実施されてもよい。 Moreover, not all the processes described in the first aspect are always required, and some of the processes described in the first aspect may be performed.
　［デブロッキングフィルタ処理の第２態様］
　第２態様における符号化装置１００に含まれるループフィルタ部１２０のデブロッキングフィルタ処理を示すフローチャートは、図１１に示す第１態様におけるデブロッキングフィルタ処理のフローチャートと同様である。 [Second mode of deblocking filter processing]
The flowchart showing the deblocking filter processing of the loop filter unit 120 included in the coding apparatus 100 in the second aspect is the same as the flowchart of the deblocking filter processing in the first aspect shown in FIG.
　第２態様では、第１態様とＢｓ判定処理（Ｓ２０１）の内容が異なる。第１態様では（５）の条件が、境界を跨いで隣接する２つのブロックのうち少なくとも一方のブロックにＬＩＣ処理を行っている、であったが、第２態様ではブロックの位置関係まで考慮している。具体的には、ループフィルタ部１２０は、対象境界を挟む２つのブロック（カレントブロック、及び隣接ブロック）のうち、隣接ブロックにＬＩＣ処理を行っている場合に、Ｂｓ≠０に設定する。例えば、ループフィルタ部１２０は、図１７に示すように左右に位置するブロックのうち、左のブロック（隣接ブロック）にＬＩＣ処理を行っている場合にはＢｓ≠０に設定する。また、ループフィルタ部１２０は、図１８に示すように上下に位置するブロックのうち、上のブロック（隣接ブロック）にＬＩＣ処理を行っている場合にはＢｓ≠０に設定する。図１９は、この場合のＢｓを算出する方法の例を示す図である。なお、（５Ａ）上下（左右）に位置するブロックのうち、上（左）のブロックにＬＩＣ処理を行っている場合のＢｓ値は、０でなければよく、１でも２でもよい。 In the second mode, the contents of the first mode and the Bs determination process (S201) are different. In the first aspect, the condition of (5) is performing LIC processing to at least one of two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary, but in the second aspect, the positional relationship of the blocks is considered. ing. Specifically, the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs ≠ 0 when the LIC process is performed on the adjacent block among the two blocks (the current block and the adjacent block) sandwiching the target boundary. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs ≠ 0 when LIC processing is performed on the left block (adjacent block) among the blocks positioned on the left and right. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs ≠ 0 when the upper block (adjacent block) of the blocks positioned above and below is being subjected to the LIC process. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case. The Bs value in the case where the LIC processing is performed on the upper (left) block among the blocks located at the top and bottom (left and right) in (5A) may be either non-zero or one or two.
　図２０は、条件（５Ａ）が満たされる場合にＢｓ＝１に設定する場合のＢｓ算出処理（Ｓ２０１）のフローチャートである。図２１は、この場合のＢｓを算出する方法の例を示す図である。 FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the Bs calculation process (S201) in the case where Bs = 1 is set when the condition (5A) is satisfied. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
　まず、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（１）の条件が満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２２１）。（１）の条件が満たされる場合（Ｓ２２１でＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝２に設定する（Ｓ２２３）。 First, the loop filter unit 120 determines whether the condition (1) is satisfied (S221). When the condition of (1) is satisfied (YES in S221), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 2 (S223).
　（１）の条件が満たされない場合（Ｓ２２１でＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（２）～（５Ａ）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２２２）。（２）～（５Ａ）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされる場合（Ｓ２２２でＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝１に設定する（Ｓ２２４）。（２）～（５Ａ）の条件のいずれも満たされない場合（Ｓ２２２でＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝０に設定する（Ｓ２２５）。 When the condition of (1) is not satisfied (NO in S221), the loop filter unit 120 determines whether at least one of the conditions of (2) to (5A) is satisfied (S222). If at least one of the conditions (2) to (5A) is satisfied (YES in S222), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 1 (S224). When none of the conditions (2) to (5A) is satisfied (NO in S222), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 0 (S225).
　図２２は、条件（５Ａ）の場合にＢｓ＝２に設定する場合のＢｓ算出処理（Ｓ２０１）のフローチャートである。図２３は、この場合のＢｓを算出する方法の例を示す図である。 FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the Bs calculation process (S201) in the case where Bs = 2 is set in the case of the condition (5A). FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
　まず、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（１）及び（５Ａ）の条件の少なくとも一方が満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２２１Ａ）。（１）及び（５Ａ）の条件の少なくとも一方が満たされる場合（Ｓ２２１ＡでＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝２に設定する（Ｓ２２３）。 First, the loop filter unit 120 determines whether at least one of the conditions (1) and (5A) is satisfied (S221A). If at least one of the conditions (1) and (5A) is satisfied (YES in S221A), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 2 (S223).
　（１）及び（５Ａ）の条件のいずれも満たされない場合（Ｓ２２１ＡでＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（２）～（４）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２２２Ａ）。（２）～（４）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされる場合（Ｓ２２２ＡでＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝１に設定する（Ｓ２２４）。（２）～（４）の条件のいずれも満たされない場合（Ｓ２２２ＡでＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝０に設定する（Ｓ２２５）。 When neither of the conditions (1) and (5A) is satisfied (NO in S221A), the loop filter unit 120 determines whether at least one of the conditions (2) to (4) is satisfied (S222A) . If at least one of the conditions (2) to (4) is satisfied (YES in S222A), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 1 (S224). When none of the conditions (2) to (4) is satisfied (NO in S222A), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 0 (S225).
　［第２態様の効果］
　第２態様の構成によれば、第１態様と比較して、過度な平滑化を低減できる可能性がある。例えば、対象境界を挟んで隣接する２つのブロック以外の領域をＬＩＣ輝度補正用周辺参照領域として用いてＬＩＣ処理を行う場合は、ブロック境界が主観的に目立ちやすくなると考えられる。この場合とは、隣接ブロックにＬＩＣ処理が行われる場合である。それ以外の場合、例えば対象境界を挟んで隣接する２つのブロック内の領域をＬＩＣ輝度補正用周辺参照領域として用いてＬＩＣ処理を行う場合にもデブロッキングフィルタを使用するようにしてしまうと、過度な平滑化が行われる可能性がある。この場合とは、対象ブロックにＬＩＣ処理が行われる場合である。よって、第２態様の構成により、この問題を解決することができる可能性がある。 [Effect of the second aspect]
According to the configuration of the second aspect, excessive smoothing may be reduced as compared with the first aspect. For example, when the LIC process is performed using an area other than two blocks adjacent to each other across the target boundary as a peripheral reference area for LIC brightness correction, it is considered that the block boundary is subjectively noticeable. In this case, the LIC process is performed on the adjacent block. In other cases, for example, if the deblocking filter is used even when the LIC process is performed using regions in two blocks adjacent to each other across the object boundary as the peripheral reference region for LIC brightness correction, it is excessive. Smoothing may occur. In this case, the LIC process is performed on the target block. Thus, the configuration of the second aspect may solve this problem.
　なお、復号装置２００に含まれるループフィルタ部２１２は、符号化装置１００に含まれるループフィルタ部１２０における上記デブロッキングフィルタ処理と同様の処理を実施する。 The loop filter unit 212 included in the decoding device 200 performs the same process as the above-described deblocking filtering process in the loop filter unit 120 included in the coding device 100.
　また、第２態様に記載した全ての処理がいつも必要とは限らず、第２態様に記載した一部の処理が実行されてもよい。 Moreover, not all the processes described in the second aspect are always required, and some of the processes described in the second aspect may be performed.
　以上のように、本実施の形態に係る符号化装置１００及び復号装置２００は、図２４に示す処理を行う。 As described above, the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 according to the present embodiment perform the process shown in FIG.
　符号化装置１００は、対象ブロックと、対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックとのうちの少なくとも一方のブロックである判定用ブロックに対して、予測画像の輝度補正処理（例えばＬＩＣ処理）を適用するかを判定する（Ｓ２３１）。 The coding apparatus 100 determines whether to apply the luminance correction process (for example, the LIC process) of the predicted image to the determination block which is at least one of the target block and the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It determines (S231).
　符号化装置１００は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用する場合（Ｓ２３１でＹＥＳ）、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する（Ｓ２３２）。一方、符号化装置１００は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用しない場合（Ｓ２３１でＮＯ）、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない（Ｓ２３３）。 When the luminance correction process is applied to the determination block (YES in S231), the encoding apparatus 100 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S232). On the other hand, when the luminance correction process is not applied to the determination block (NO in S231), the encoding apparatus 100 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S233).
　ここで、判定用ブロックとは、上記第１態様においては、対象ブロック及び隣接ブロックである。つまり、符号化装置１００は、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックの一方、又は両方に対して輝度補正処理を適用する場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する。符号化装置１００は、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとのいずれに対しても輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 Here, the determination block is the target block and the adjacent block in the first aspect. That is, the encoding apparatus 100 applies the deblocking filtering process to the boundary when the luminance correction process is applied to one or both of the target block and the adjacent block. The encoding apparatus 100 does not apply the deblocking filtering process to the boundary when the luminance correction process is not applied to any of the target block and the adjacent block.
　また、判定用ブロックとは、上記第２態様においては、隣接ブロックである。つまり、符号化装置１００は、対象ブロックに対する輝度補正処理の適用の有無に関わらず、隣接ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用する場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する。符号化装置１００は、対象ブロックに対する輝度補正処理の適用の有無に関わらず、隣接ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 In the second aspect, the determination block is an adjacent block. That is, the encoding apparatus 100 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary when applying the luminance correction process to the adjacent block regardless of whether the luminance correction process is applied to the target block. The encoding apparatus 100 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary when the luminance correction process is not applied to the adjacent block regardless of whether the luminance correction process is applied to the target block.
　例えば、符号化装置１００は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用する場合、前記境界の境界強度を示すＢｓを０以外の値に設定することで、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する。符号化装置１００は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、Ｂｓを０に設定することで、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 For example, when the luminance correction process is applied to the determination block, the encoding apparatus 100 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than 0. Do. When the luminance correction process is not applied to the determination block, the encoding apparatus 100 sets Bs to 0, thereby not applying the deblocking filter process to the boundary.
　また、本実施の形態に係る復号装置２００は、対象ブロックと、対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックとのうちの少なくとも一方のブロックである判定用ブロックに対して、予測画像の輝度補正処理（例えばＬＩＣ処理）を適用するかを判定する（Ｓ２３１）。 In addition, the decoding apparatus 200 according to the present embodiment performs luminance correction processing (for example, LIC) of a predicted image on a determination block that is at least one of a target block and an adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It is determined whether the process is applied (S231).
　復号装置２００は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用する場合（Ｓ２３１でＹＥＳ）、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する（Ｓ２３２）。一方、復号装置２００は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用しない場合（Ｓ２３１でＮＯ）、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない（Ｓ２３３）。 When the luminance correction process is applied to the determination block (YES in S231), the decoding apparatus 200 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S232). On the other hand, when the luminance correction process is not applied to the determination block (NO in S231), the decoding apparatus 200 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S233).
　ここで、判定用ブロックとは、上記第１態様においては、対象ブロック及び隣接ブロックである。つまり、復号装置２００は、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックの一方、又は両方に対して輝度補正処理を適用する場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する。復号装置２００は、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとのいずれに対しても輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 Here, the determination block is the target block and the adjacent block in the first aspect. That is, when applying the luminance correction process to one or both of the target block and the adjacent block, the decoding apparatus 200 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary. When the luminance correction process is not applied to any of the target block and the adjacent block, the decoding apparatus 200 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary.
　また、判定用ブロックとは、上記第２態様においては、隣接ブロックである。つまり、復号装置２００は、対象ブロックに対する輝度補正処理の適用の有無に関わらず、隣接ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用する場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する。復号装置２００は、対象ブロックに対する輝度補正処理の適用の有無に関わらず、隣接ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 In the second aspect, the determination block is an adjacent block. That is, the decoding apparatus 200 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary when applying the luminance correction process to the adjacent block regardless of whether the luminance correction process is applied to the target block. The decoding apparatus 200 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary when the luminance correction process is not applied to the adjacent block regardless of whether the luminance correction process is applied to the target block.
　例えば、復号装置２００は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用する場合、前記境界の境界強度を示すＢｓを０以外の値に設定することで、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する。復号装置２００は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、Ｂｓを０に設定することで、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 For example, when the luminance correction process is applied to the determination block, the decoding apparatus 200 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than 0. . When the luminance correction process is not applied to the determination block, the decoding apparatus 200 sets Bs to 0, thereby not applying the deblocking filter process to the boundary.
　また、本実施の形態に係る符号化装置１００は、画像を複数のブロックに分割する分割部１０２と、前記画像に含まれる参照ピクチャを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するイントラ予測部１２４と、前記画像とは異なる他の画像に含まれる参照ブロックを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するインター予測部１２６と、前記画像に含まれるブロックにフィルタを適用するループフィルタ部１２０と、前記イントラ予測部１２４または前記インター予測部１２６により生成された予測信号と原信号との予測誤差を変換して変換係数を生成する変換部１０６と、前記変換係数を量子化して量子化係数を生成する量子化部１０８と、前記量子化係数を可変長符号化することにより符号化ビットストリームを生成するエントロピー符号化部１１０と、を備える。ループフィルタ部１２０は、対象ブロックと、対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックとのうちの少なくとも一方のブロックである判定用ブロックに対して、予測画像の輝度補正処理（例えばＬＩＣ処理）を適用するかを判定する（Ｓ２３１）。ループフィルタ部１２０は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用する場合（Ｓ２３１でＹＥＳ）、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する（Ｓ２３２）。一方、ループフィルタ部１２０は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用しない場合（Ｓ２３１でＮＯ）、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない（Ｓ２３３）。 In addition, encoding apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment divides image into a plurality of blocks, and intra prediction unit 124 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference picture included in the image. An inter prediction unit 126 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; a loop filter unit 120 that applies a filter to the block included in the image; A conversion unit 106 that converts a prediction error between the prediction signal generated by the intra prediction unit 124 or the inter prediction unit 126 and the original signal to generate a conversion coefficient, and quantizes the conversion coefficient to generate a quantization coefficient Quantization unit 108, and entropy that generates a coded bit stream by variable-length coding the quantization coefficient. It includes an encoding unit 110, a. The loop filter unit 120 determines whether to apply the luminance correction process (for example, the LIC process) of the predicted image to the determination block which is at least one of the target block and the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It determines (S231). When the luminance correction process is applied to the determination block (YES in S231), the loop filter unit 120 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S232). On the other hand, when the luminance correction process is not applied to the determination block (NO in S231), the loop filter unit 120 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S233).
　また、本実施の形態に係る復号装置２００は、符号化ビットストリームを復号して量子化係数を出力する復号部（エントロピー復号部２０２）と、前記量子化係数を逆量子化して変換係数を出力する逆量子化部２０４と、前記変換係数を逆変換して予測誤差を出力する逆変換部２０６と、画像に含まれる参照ピクチャを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するイントラ予測部２１６と、前記画像とは異なる他の画像に含まれる参照ブロックを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するインター予測部２１８と、前記画像に含まれるブロックにフィルタを適用するループフィルタ部２１２と、を備える。ループフィルタ部２１２は、対象ブロックと、対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックとのうちの少なくとも一方のブロックである判定用ブロックに対して、予測画像の輝度補正処理（例えばＬＩＣ処理）を適用するかを判定する（Ｓ２３１）。ループフィルタ部２１２は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用する場合（Ｓ２３１でＹＥＳ）、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する（Ｓ２３２）。一方、ループフィルタ部２１２は、判定用ブロックに対して輝度補正処理を適用しない場合（Ｓ２３１でＮＯ）、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない（Ｓ２３３）。 In addition, the decoding apparatus 200 according to the present embodiment decodes a coded bit stream and outputs a quantization coefficient (entropy decoding unit 202), and inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient to output a transform coefficient. An inverse quantization unit 204 for performing inverse transform, an inverse transform unit 206 for inversely transforming the transform coefficient and outputting a prediction error, and an intra prediction unit 216 for predicting a block included in the image using a reference picture included in the image An inter prediction unit 218 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; and a loop filter unit 212 that applies a filter to the block included in the image Prepare. The loop filter unit 212 determines whether to apply the luminance correction process (for example, the LIC process) of the predicted image to the determination block which is at least one of the target block and the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It determines (S231). When the luminance correction process is applied to the determination block (YES in S231), the loop filter unit 212 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S232). On the other hand, when the luminance correction process is not applied to the determination block (NO in S231), the loop filter unit 212 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S233).
　［デブロッキングフィルタ処理の第３態様］
　第３態様における符号化装置１００に含まれるループフィルタ部１２０のデブロッキングフィルタ処理を示すフローチャートは、図１１に示す第１態様におけるデブロッキングフィルタ処理のフローチャートと同様である。 [Third Aspect of Deblocking Filter Processing]
The flowchart showing the deblocking filter processing of the loop filter unit 120 included in the encoding device 100 in the third aspect is the same as the flowchart of the deblocking filter processing in the first aspect shown in FIG.
　第３態様では、第１態様とＢｓ判定処理（Ｓ２０１）の内容が異なる。第１態様では（５）の条件が、境界を跨いで隣接する２つのブロックのうち少なくとも一方のブロックにＬＩＣ処理を行っている、であったが、第３態様ではそれに加えて、ＬＩＣ処理の輝度補正パラメータの内容まで考慮している。 In the third aspect, the contents of the first aspect and the Bs determination process (S201) are different. In the first aspect, the condition (5) is performing LIC processing on at least one of two blocks adjacent to each other across the boundary, but in the third aspect, in addition to that, LIC processing Even the content of the brightness correction parameter is considered.
　具体的には、ループフィルタ部１２０は、対象境界を挟む２つのブロックである隣接ブロックと対象ブロックとの少なくとも一方にＬＩＣ処理を行っており、且つ、隣接ブロックと対象ブロックとでＬＩＣ処理の輝度補正パラメータが異なる場合には、Ｂｓ≠０に設定する。例えば、ループフィルタ部１２０は、上下に位置するブロックのうち、少なくとも一方にＬＩＣ処理を行っており、且つ上のブロックが持つ輝度補正パラメータと下のブロックが持つ輝度補正パラメータとが異なる場合には、Ｂｓ≠０に設定する。また、ループフィルタ部１２０は、左右に位置するブロックのうち、少なくとも一方にＬＩＣ処理を行っており、且つ左のブロックが持つ輝度補正パラメータと右のブロックが持つ輝度補正パラメータとが異なる場合には、Ｂｓ≠０に設定する。なおここで、ブロック境界を跨ぐ片方のブロックにＬＩＣ処理を行っており、もう片方のブロックにＬＩＣ処理を行っていない場合は、ＬＩＣ処理の輝度補正パラメータが異なると判断される。 Specifically, the loop filter unit 120 performs LIC processing on at least one of the adjacent block and the target block which are two blocks sandwiching the target boundary, and the luminance of the LIC processing in the adjacent block and the target block If the correction parameters are different, Bs ≠ 0 is set. For example, when the loop filter unit 120 performs LIC processing on at least one of the upper and lower blocks and the luminance correction parameter of the upper block is different from the luminance correction parameter of the lower block. , Set Bs ≠ 0. In addition, when the loop filter unit 120 performs LIC processing on at least one of the blocks positioned on the left and right, and the luminance correction parameter of the left block differs from the luminance correction parameter of the right block. , Set Bs ≠ 0. Here, when the LIC process is performed on one block across the block boundary and the LIC process is not performed on the other block, it is determined that the brightness correction parameters of the LIC process are different.
　図２５は、この場合のＢｓを算出する方法の例を示す図である。なお、（５Ｂ）境界を跨いで隣接する２つのブロックのうち少なくとも一方のブロックがＬＩＣ処理を行っており、上下（左右）に位置するブロックが持つ輝度補正パラメータが異なる場合のＢｓ値は、０でなければよく、１でも２でもよい。 FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case. It should be noted that (5B) Bs value is 0 when at least one of the two blocks adjacent across the boundary is performing LIC processing and the luminance correction parameters of the blocks located vertically (left and right) are different. Otherwise, it may be one or two.
　ここで、輝度補正パラメータとは、例えば上述した係数Ａ及びＢである。また、２つの輝度補正パラメータが異なるとは、２つの輝度補正パラメータの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合を意味してもよい。例えば、ループフィルタ部１２０は、２つの輝度補正パラメータに含まれる係数Ａの差と、係数Ｂの差とを算出し、算出した２つの差の和が閾値より大きい場合に、２つの輝度補正パラメータが異なると判定する。なお、ループフィルタ部１２０は、２つの差の和ではなく、２つの差の重み付け加算し、得られた値と閾値とを比較してもよい。また、ループフィルタ部１２０は、２つの差の各々と閾値とを比較し、少なくとも一方が閾値より大きい場合に、２つの輝度補正パラメータが異なると判定してもよい。なお、２つの差と比較する閾値は同一であってもよいし、異なってもよい。また、ループフィルタ部１２０は、上記以外の方法を用いてもよい。 Here, the luminance correction parameters are, for example, the coefficients A and B described above. Also, the difference between the two brightness correction parameters may mean that the difference between the two brightness correction parameters is larger than a predetermined threshold value. For example, the loop filter unit 120 calculates the difference between the coefficient A included in the two brightness correction parameters and the difference between the coefficients B, and when the calculated sum of the two differences is larger than the threshold value, the two brightness correction parameters Is determined to be different. The loop filter unit 120 may perform weighted addition of two differences instead of the sum of the two differences, and compare the obtained value with a threshold. Also, the loop filter unit 120 may compare each of the two differences with a threshold, and determine that the two brightness correction parameters are different if at least one is greater than the threshold. Note that the threshold value to be compared with the two differences may be the same or different. In addition, the loop filter unit 120 may use a method other than the above.
　図２６は、条件（５Ｂ）が満たされる場合にＢｓ＝１に設定する場合のＢｓ算出処理（Ｓ２０１）のフローチャートである。図２７は、この場合のＢｓを算出する方法の例を示す図である。 FIG. 26 is a flowchart of Bs calculation processing (S201) in the case where Bs = 1 is set when the condition (5B) is satisfied. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
　まず、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（１）の条件が満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２４１）。（１）の条件が満たされる場合（Ｓ２４１でＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝２に設定する（Ｓ２４３）。 First, the loop filter unit 120 determines whether the condition (1) is satisfied (S241). When the condition of (1) is satisfied (YES in S241), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 2 (S243).
　（１）の条件が満たされない場合（Ｓ２４１でＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（２）～（５Ｂ）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２４２）。（２）～（５Ｂ）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされる場合（Ｓ２４２でＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝１に設定する（Ｓ２４４）。（２）～（５Ｂ）の条件のいずれも満たされない場合（Ｓ２４２でＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝０に設定する（Ｓ２４５）。 When the condition of (1) is not satisfied (NO in S241), the loop filter unit 120 determines whether at least one of the conditions of (2) to (5B) is satisfied (S242). If at least one of the conditions (2) to (5B) is satisfied (YES in S242), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 1 (S244). When none of the conditions (2) to (5B) is satisfied (NO in S242), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 0 (S245).
　図２８は、条件（５Ｂ）が満たされる場合にＢｓ＝２に設定する場合のＢｓ算出処理（Ｓ２０１）のフローチャートである。図２９は、この場合のＢｓを算出する方法の例を示す図である。 FIG. 28 is a flowchart of Bs calculation processing (S201) in the case where Bs = 2 is set when the condition (5B) is satisfied. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a method of calculating Bs in this case.
　まず、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（１）及び（５Ｂ）の条件の少なくとも一方が満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２４１Ａ）。（１）及び（５Ｂ）の条件の少なくとも一方が満たされる場合（Ｓ２４１ＡでＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝２に設定する（Ｓ２４３）。 First, the loop filter unit 120 determines whether at least one of the conditions (1) and (5B) is satisfied (S241A). If at least one of the conditions (1) and (5B) is satisfied (YES in S241A), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 2 (S243).
　（１）及び（５Ｂ）の条件のいずれも満たされない場合（Ｓ２４１ＡでＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、（２）～（４）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされるかを判定する（Ｓ２４２Ａ）。（２）～（４）の条件のうち少なくとも一つが満たされる場合（Ｓ２４２ＡでＹＥＳ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝１に設定する（Ｓ２４４）。（２）～（４）の条件のいずれも満たされない場合（Ｓ２４２ＡでＮＯ）、ループフィルタ部１２０は、Ｂｓ＝０に設定する（Ｓ２４５）。 When neither of the conditions (1) and (5B) is satisfied (NO in S241A), the loop filter unit 120 determines whether at least one of the conditions (2) to (4) is satisfied (S242A) . If at least one of the conditions (2) to (4) is satisfied (YES in S242A), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 1 (S244). When none of the conditions (2) to (4) is satisfied (NO in S242A), the loop filter unit 120 sets Bs = 0 (S245).
　［第３態様の効果］
　第３態様の構成によれば、第１態様と比較して、過度な平滑化を低減できる可能性がある。ここで、輝度補正パラメータが対象境界を挟んだ２つのブロックで同じ場合、輝度補正パラメータが違う場合と比較するとブロック境界は目立ちにくい。このような場合にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることで、過度な平滑化が行われる可能性がある。一方、第３態様の構成を用いることにより、過度な平滑化を低減できる可能性がある。 [Effect of the third aspect]
According to the configuration of the third aspect, excessive smoothing may be reduced as compared to the first aspect. Here, when the luminance correction parameter is the same in two blocks across the target boundary, the block boundary is less noticeable as compared with the case where the luminance correction parameter is different. In such a case, excessive smoothing may be performed by performing deblocking filtering. On the other hand, there is a possibility that excessive smoothing can be reduced by using the configuration of the third aspect.
　なお、復号装置２００に含まれるループフィルタ部２１２は、符号化装置１００に含まれるループフィルタ部１２０における上記デブロッキングフィルタ処理と同様の処理を実施する。 The loop filter unit 212 included in the decoding device 200 performs the same process as the above-described deblocking filtering process in the loop filter unit 120 included in the coding device 100.
　また、第３態様に記載した全ての処理いつも必要とは限らず、第３態様に記載した一部の処理が実行されてもよい。 In addition, not all the processes described in the third aspect are always required, and part of the processes described in the third aspect may be executed.
　［変形例］
　ループフィルタ部１２０は、スライス単位で上記処理を行うか、行わないかを切り替えてもよい。ループフィルタ部１２０は、タイル単位で上記処理を行うか、行わないかを切り替えてもよい。ループフィルタ部１２０は、ＣＴＵ単位で上記処理を行うか、行わないかを切り替えてもよい。ループフィルタ部１２０は、ＣＵ単位で上記処理を行うか、行わないかを切り替えてもよい。ループフィルタ部１２０は、処理対象のフレームのフレーム種（Ｐフレーム、Ｂフレーム等）に応じて上記処理を行うか、行わないかを切り替えてもよい。 [Modification]
The loop filter unit 120 may switch whether to perform the above processing in units of slices or not. The loop filter unit 120 may switch whether to perform the above processing in tile units or not. The loop filter unit 120 may switch whether to perform the above processing in CTU units or not. The loop filter unit 120 may switch whether or not to perform the above process in CU units. The loop filter unit 120 may switch whether to perform the above process or not according to the frame type (P frame, B frame, etc.) of the frame to be processed.
　また、上記実施の形態では、ＬＩＣ輝度補正用周辺参照領域がブロックの左隣接及び上隣接の符号化済み周辺参照領域の輝度画素値である例を示したが、この限りでなくてもよい。例えば、符号化装置１００は、ＬＩＣ輝度補正用周辺参照領域として左隣接の符号化済み周辺参照領域の輝度画素値を用いず、上隣接の符号化済み周辺参照領域の輝度画素値を用いてもよい。また、符号化装置１００は、条件に応じてＬＩＣ輝度補正用周辺参照領域を変化させてもよい。例えば、符号化装置１００は、動きベクトルの差分の小さいブロックをＬＩＣ輝度補正用周辺参照領域として用いてもよい。 In the above embodiment, the LIC luminance correction peripheral reference area is an example of the luminance pixel value of the encoded adjacent peripheral reference area on the left and upper sides of the block. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the encoding apparatus 100 does not use the luminance pixel value of the left adjacent encoded peripheral reference region as the LIC luminance correction peripheral reference region, but uses the luminance pixel value of the upper adjacent encoded peripheral reference region. Good. In addition, the encoding apparatus 100 may change the peripheral reference area for LIC luminance correction according to the condition. For example, the encoding apparatus 100 may use a block with a small motion vector difference as a peripheral reference area for LIC luminance correction.
　また、上記実施の形態ではＢｓ値として０～２の値を設ける例を示したが、Ｂｓ値の取りうる値はこの例に限らず、その他の値を採用してもよい。例えば、Ｂｓ値として３以上の値が用いられてもよい。この場合、ループフィルタ部１２０は、上述した（５）又は（５Ａ）の条件が満たされる場合に、Ｂｓ値として３以上の値を設定してもよい。 Further, although the example in which the value of 0 to 2 is provided as the Bs value is shown in the above embodiment, the possible value of the Bs value is not limited to this example, and other values may be adopted. For example, three or more values may be used as the Bs value. In this case, when the condition (5) or (5A) described above is satisfied, the loop filter unit 120 may set three or more values as the Bs value.
　また、ループフィルタ部１２０は、２つのブロックの各々にＬＩＣ処理が使用されるか否かの判定を、各ブロックにＬＩＣ処理が使用されるか否かを示すＬＩＣフラグを参照することで行ってもよいし、ＬＩＣフラグを用いずに行ってもよい。例えば、周辺ブロックにＬＩＣ処理が用いられている場合には対象ブロックにもＬＩＣ処理を用い、周辺ブロックにＬＩＣ処理が用いられていない場合には対象ブロックにもＬＩＣ処理を用いない等のルールが定められている場合には、ループフィルタ部１２０は、周辺ブロックのＬＩＣ使用状況を用いて対象ブロックにＬＩＣ処理が使用されるか否かを判定してもよい。 Also, the loop filter unit 120 determines whether LIC processing is used for each of the two blocks by referring to a LIC flag indicating whether or not LIC processing is used for each block. It may be done without using the LIC flag. For example, if the LIC process is used for the peripheral block, the LIC process is used for the target block, and if the LIC process is not used for the peripheral block, the LIC process is not used for the target block. In the case where it is determined, the loop filter unit 120 may determine whether LIC processing is used for the target block using the LIC usage status of the peripheral block.
　また、上記説明では、ＬＩＣ処理が適用されるか否かに応じてデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行うか否かを決定する例を説明したが、符号化装置１００は、ＬＩＣ処理が適用されるか否かに応じて、デブロッキングフィルタ処理のフィルタ強度を変更してもよい。例えば、符号化装置１００は、ＬＩＣ処理が適用される場合には、ＬＩＣ処理が適用されない場合に比べて、デブロッキングフィルタ処理のフィルタ強度を強くしてもよい。 In the above description, an example of determining whether to perform deblocking filter processing according to whether or not LIC processing is applied has been described. However, the encoding apparatus 100 may determine whether LIC processing is applied or not. Depending on the level, the filter strength of the deblocking filtering may be changed. For example, when the LIC process is applied, the encoding apparatus 100 may increase the filter strength of the deblocking filter process as compared to the case where the LIC process is not applied.
　また、符号化装置１００は、デブロッキングフィルタ処理を、ブロック境界だけでなくサブブロック境界にかけてもよい。ここで、ブロックとは、例えば、直交変換の処理単位（単位ブロック）であり、サブブロックとは予測処理の処理単位（単位ブロック）である。 Also, the coding apparatus 100 may extend the deblocking filtering process not only to block boundaries but also to subblock boundaries. Here, a block is, for example, a processing unit (unit block) of orthogonal transformation, and a sub-block is a processing unit (unit block) of prediction processing.
　また、第３態様において輝度補正パラメータが同じである場合とは、対象境界を挟む両ブロックにおける輝度補正パラメータが全く同じ値である場合である場合に限定されず、両ブロックのパラメータの差分値が所定値以下である場合であってもよい。 The third embodiment is not limited to the case where the luminance correction parameters are the same, but is not limited to the case where the luminance correction parameters in both blocks sandwiching the target boundary are exactly the same value, and the difference value between the parameters of both blocks is It may be the case where it is less than a predetermined value.
　また、第１態様から第３態様で例示したＢｓ算出処理は、適宜組合せ又は変更可能である。すなわち、符号化装置１００は、境界を挟む２つのブロックにおける輝度補正パラメータ及び／又はＬＩＣ処理の適用有無に基づいて、当該境界におけるデブロッキングフィルタ処理の適用の有無に関するパラメータを決定すればよい。本開示は、例示した算出処理の条件又は判定順に限定されない。 In addition, the Bs calculation processes exemplified in the first to third aspects can be appropriately combined or changed. That is, the encoding apparatus 100 may determine the parameter regarding the presence or absence of the application of the deblocking filter processing in the boundary based on the luminance correction parameter and / or the application presence or absence of the LIC processing in the two blocks sandwiching the boundary. The present disclosure is not limited to the exemplified conditions or determination order of the calculation process.
　なお、復号装置２００に含まれるループフィルタ部２１２についても同様である。 The same applies to the loop filter unit 212 included in the decoding device 200.
　以上のように、本実施の形態に係る符号化装置１００及び復号装置２００は、図３０に示す処理を行う。 As described above, coding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 according to the present embodiment perform the process shown in FIG.
　符号化装置１００は、対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理（例えばＬＩＣ処理）に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きいか否かを判定する（Ｓ２５１）。 The encoding apparatus 100 includes a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing (for example, LIC processing) of a predicted image for a target block, and a second luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing for an adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It is determined whether or not the difference between the two and the above is greater than a predetermined threshold (S251).
　符号化装置１００は、前記差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合（Ｓ２５１でＹＥＳ）、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する（Ｓ２５２）。一方、符号化装置１００は、前記差が閾値より小さい場合（Ｓ２５２でＮＯ）、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない（Ｓ２５３）。 If the difference is larger than a predetermined threshold (YES in S251), the encoding apparatus 100 applies deblocking filtering to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S252). On the other hand, when the difference is smaller than the threshold (NO in S252), the encoding apparatus 100 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S253).
　これによれば、符号化装置１００は、対象ブロックの輝度補正パラメータと隣接ブロックの輝度補正パラメータとの差が閾値より大きい場合にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行う。これにより、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できるので復号画像の画質を向上できる。また、符号化装置１００は、上記差が閾値より小さい場合にはデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行わない。これにより、符号化装置１００は、過度にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることを抑制できる。 According to this, the encoding apparatus 100 performs the deblocking filter process when the difference between the luminance correction parameter of the target block and the luminance correction parameter of the adjacent block is larger than the threshold. As a result, block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved. In addition, the coding apparatus 100 does not perform deblocking filter processing when the difference is smaller than the threshold. By this means, encoding apparatus 100 can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
　例えば、符号化装置１００は、対象ブロック及び隣接ブロックの一方に対して輝度補正処理を適用し、対象ブロック及び隣接ブロックの他方に対して輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する。 For example, when the coding apparatus 100 applies the luminance correction process to one of the target block and the adjacent block and does not apply the luminance correction process to the other of the target block and the adjacent block, the deblocking filter process is performed on the boundary. Apply.
　これによれば、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できるので復号画像の画質を向上できる。 According to this, it is possible to reduce subjectively noticeable block noise, so it is possible to improve the image quality of the decoded image.
　例えば、符号化装置１００は、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとのいずれに対しても輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 For example, when the luminance correction process is not applied to any of the target block and the adjacent block, the encoding apparatus 100 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary.
　これによれば、符号化装置１００は、過度にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることを抑制できる。 According to this, the encoding apparatus 100 can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
　例えば、符号化装置１００は、前記差が閾値より大きい場合、前記境界の境界強度を示すＢｓを０以外の値に設定することで、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する。符号化装置１００は、前記差が閾値より小さい場合、Ｂｓを０に設定することで、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 For example, when the difference is larger than a threshold, the encoding apparatus 100 applies deblocking filtering to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than zero. If the difference is smaller than the threshold, the encoding apparatus 100 does not apply deblocking filtering to the boundary by setting Bs to 0.
　例えば、対象ブロック及び隣接ブロックは、予測処理の単位ブロックである。 For example, the target block and the adjacent block are unit blocks of prediction processing.
　また、復号装置２００は、対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理（例えばＬＩＣ処理）に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きいか否かを判定する（Ｓ２５１）。 In addition, the decoding device 200 performs the first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing (for example, LIC processing) of the predicted image for the target block and the second luminance correction used for luminance correction processing for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It is determined whether the difference from the parameter is larger than a predetermined threshold (S251).
　復号装置２００は、前記差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合（Ｓ２５１でＹＥＳ）、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する（Ｓ２５２）。一方、復号装置２００は、前記差が閾値より小さい場合（Ｓ２５１でＮＯ）、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない（Ｓ２５３）。 If the difference is larger than a predetermined threshold (YES in S251), the decoding apparatus 200 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S252). On the other hand, when the difference is smaller than the threshold (NO in S251), the decoding device 200 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S253).
　これによれば、復号装置２００は、対象ブロックの輝度補正パラメータと隣接ブロックの輝度補正パラメータとの差が閾値より大きい場合にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行う。これにより、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できるので復号画像の画質を向上できる。また、復号装置２００は、上記差が閾値より小さい場合にはデブロッキングフィルタ処理を行わない。これにより、復号装置２００は、過度にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることを抑制できる。 According to this, the decoding apparatus 200 performs the deblocking filter process when the difference between the luminance correction parameter of the target block and the luminance correction parameter of the adjacent block is larger than the threshold. As a result, block noise that is subjectively noticeable can be reduced, so that the image quality of the decoded image can be improved. In addition, the decoding device 200 does not perform the deblocking filter process when the difference is smaller than the threshold. Accordingly, the decoding apparatus 200 can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
　例えば、復号装置２００は、対象ブロック及び隣接ブロックの一方に対して輝度補正処理を適用し、対象ブロック及び隣接ブロックの他方に対して輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する。 For example, when the decoding apparatus 200 applies the luminance correction process to one of the target block and the adjacent block and does not apply the luminance correction process to the other of the target block and the adjacent block, the deblocking filter process is performed on the boundary. Apply
　これによれば、主観的に目立つブロックノイズを低減できるので復号画像の画質を向上できる。 According to this, it is possible to reduce subjectively noticeable block noise, so it is possible to improve the image quality of the decoded image.
　例えば、復号装置２００は、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとのいずれに対しても輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 For example, when the luminance correction process is not applied to any of the target block and the adjacent block, the decoding apparatus 200 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary.
　これによれば、復号装置２００は、過度にデブロッキングフィルタ処理が行われることを抑制できる。 According to this, the decoding apparatus 200 can suppress excessive deblocking filter processing from being performed.
　例えば、復号装置２００は、前記差が閾値より大きい場合、前記境界の境界強度を示すＢｓを０以外の値に設定することで、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する。復号装置２００は、前記差が閾値より小さい場合、Ｂｓを０に設定することで、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない。 For example, when the difference is larger than a threshold, the decoding apparatus 200 applies deblocking filtering to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than zero. If the difference is smaller than the threshold, the decoding apparatus 200 does not apply deblocking filtering to the boundary by setting Bs to 0.
　例えば、対象ブロック及び隣接ブロックは、予測処理の単位ブロックである。 For example, the target block and the adjacent block are unit blocks of prediction processing.
　また、本実施の形態に係る符号化装置１００は、画像を複数のブロックに分割する分割部１０２と、前記画像に含まれる参照ピクチャを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するイントラ予測部１２４と、前記画像とは異なる他の画像に含まれる参照ブロックを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するインター予測部１２６と、前記画像に含まれるブロックにフィルタを適用するループフィルタ部１２０と、前記イントラ予測部１２４または前記インター予測部１２６により生成された予測信号と原信号との予測誤差を変換して変換係数を生成する変換部１０６と、前記変換係数を量子化して量子化係数を生成する量子化部１０８と、前記量子化係数を可変長符号化することにより符号化ビットストリームを生成するエントロピー符号化部１１０と、を備える。ループフィルタ部１２０は、対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理（例えばＬＩＣ処理）に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きいか否かを判定する（Ｓ２５１）。ループフィルタ部１２０は、前記差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合（Ｓ２５１でＹＥＳ）、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する（Ｓ２５２）。一方、ループフィルタ部１２０は、前記差が閾値より小さい場合（Ｓ２５１でＮＯ）、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない（Ｓ２５３）。 In addition, encoding apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment divides image into a plurality of blocks, and intra prediction unit 124 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference picture included in the image. An inter prediction unit 126 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; a loop filter unit 120 that applies a filter to the block included in the image; A conversion unit 106 that converts a prediction error between the prediction signal generated by the intra prediction unit 124 or the inter prediction unit 126 and the original signal to generate a conversion coefficient, and quantizes the conversion coefficient to generate a quantization coefficient Quantization unit 108, and entropy that generates a coded bit stream by variable-length coding the quantization coefficient. It includes an encoding unit 110, a. The loop filter unit 120 uses the first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing (for example, LIC processing) of the predicted image for the target block, and the second luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It is determined whether or not the difference between the two and the above is greater than a predetermined threshold (S251). When the difference is larger than a predetermined threshold (YES in S251), the loop filter unit 120 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S252). On the other hand, when the difference is smaller than the threshold (NO in S251), the loop filter unit 120 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S253).
　また、本実施の形態に係る復号装置２００は、符号化ビットストリームを復号して量子化係数を出力する復号部（エントロピー復号部２０２）と、前記量子化係数を逆量子化して変換係数を出力する逆量子化部２０４と、前記変換係数を逆変換して予測誤差を出力する逆変換部２０６と、画像に含まれる参照ピクチャを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するイントラ予測部２１６と、前記画像とは異なる他の画像に含まれる参照ブロックを用いて前記画像に含まれるブロックを予測するインター予測部２１８と、前記画像に含まれるブロックにフィルタを適用するループフィルタ部２１２と、を備える。ループフィルタ部２１２は、対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理（例えばＬＩＣ処理）に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きいか否かを判定する（Ｓ２５１）。ループフィルタ部２１２は、前記差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合（Ｓ２５１でＹＥＳ）、対象ブロックと隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する（Ｓ２５２）。一方、ループフィルタ部２１２は、前記差が閾値より小さい場合（Ｓ２５１でＮＯ）、前記境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない（Ｓ２５３）。 In addition, the decoding apparatus 200 according to the present embodiment decodes a coded bit stream and outputs a quantization coefficient (entropy decoding unit 202), and inversely quantizes the quantization coefficient to output a transform coefficient. An inverse quantization unit 204 for performing inverse transform, an inverse transform unit 206 for inversely transforming the transform coefficient and outputting a prediction error, and an intra prediction unit 216 for predicting a block included in the image using a reference picture included in the image An inter prediction unit 218 that predicts a block included in the image using a reference block included in another image different from the image; and a loop filter unit 212 that applies a filter to the block included in the image Prepare. The loop filter unit 212 performs a first luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing (for example, LIC processing) of a predicted image for a target block, and a second luminance correction parameter used for luminance correction processing for an adjacent block adjacent to the target block. It is determined whether or not the difference between the two and the above is greater than a predetermined threshold (S251). When the difference is larger than a predetermined threshold (YES in S251), the loop filter unit 212 applies the deblocking filter process to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block (S252). On the other hand, when the difference is smaller than the threshold (NO in S251), the loop filter unit 212 does not apply the deblocking filter process to the boundary (S253).
　［符号化装置の実装例］
　図３１は、実施の形態１に係る符号化装置１００の実装例を示すブロック図である。符号化装置１００は、回路１６０及びメモリ１６２を備える。例えば、図１に示された符号化装置１００の複数の構成要素は、図３１に示された回路１６０及びメモリ１６２によって実装される。 [Implementation example of encoding device]
FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of the coding apparatus 100 according to Embodiment 1. The coding apparatus 100 includes a circuit 160 and a memory 162. For example, the components of the coding apparatus 100 shown in FIG. 1 are implemented by the circuit 160 and the memory 162 shown in FIG.
　回路１６０は、情報処理を行う回路であり、メモリ１６２にアクセス可能な回路である。例えば、回路１６０は、動画像を符号化する専用又は汎用の電子回路である。回路１６０は、ＣＰＵのようなプロセッサであってもよい。また、回路１６０は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよい。また、例えば、回路１６０は、図１等に示された符号化装置１００の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素を除く、複数の構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。 The circuit 160 is a circuit that performs information processing and can access the memory 162. For example, the circuit 160 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that encodes a moving image. The circuit 160 may be a processor such as a CPU. The circuit 160 may also be an assembly of a plurality of electronic circuits. Also, for example, the circuit 160 may play a role of a plurality of components excluding the component for storing information among the plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 and the like.
　メモリ１６２は、回路１６０が動画像を符号化するための情報が記憶される専用又は汎用のメモリである。メモリ１６２は、電子回路であってもよく、回路１６０に接続されていてもよい。また、メモリ１６２は、回路１６０に含まれていてもよい。また、メモリ１６２は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよい。また、メモリ１６２は、磁気ディスク又は光ディスク等であってもよいし、ストレージ又は記録媒体等と表現されてもよい。また、メモリ１６２は、不揮発性メモリでもよいし、揮発性メモリでもよい。 The memory 162 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 160 to encode moving pictures is stored. The memory 162 may be an electronic circuit or may be connected to the circuit 160. The memory 162 may also be included in the circuit 160. Also, the memory 162 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits. In addition, the memory 162 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium. The memory 162 may be a non-volatile memory or a volatile memory.
　例えば、メモリ１６２には、符号化される動画像が記憶されてもよいし、符号化された動画像に対応するビット列が記憶されてもよい。また、メモリ１６２には、回路１６０が動画像を符号化するためのプログラムが記憶されていてもよい。 For example, the moving image to be encoded may be stored in the memory 162, or a bit string corresponding to the encoded moving image may be stored. The memory 162 may also store a program for the circuit 160 to encode a moving image.
　また、例えば、メモリ１６２は、図１等に示された符号化装置１００の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。具体的には、メモリ１６２は、図１に示されたブロックメモリ１１８及びフレームメモリ１２２の役割を果たしてもよい。より具体的には、メモリ１６２には、再構成済みブロック及び再構成済みピクチャ等が記憶されてもよい。 Also, for example, the memory 162 may play a role of a component for storing information among the plurality of components of the encoding device 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 and the like. Specifically, the memory 162 may play the role of the block memory 118 and the frame memory 122 shown in FIG. More specifically, the memory 162 may store reconstructed blocks, reconstructed pictures, and the like.
　なお、符号化装置１００において、図１等に示された複数の構成要素の全てが実装されなくてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の全てが行われなくてもよい。図１等に示された複数の構成要素の一部は、他の装置に含まれていてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の一部は、他の装置によって実行されてもよい。そして、符号化装置１００において、図１等に示された複数の構成要素のうちの一部が実装され、上述された複数の処理の一部が行われることによって、動き補償が効率的に行われる。 In the coding apparatus 100, all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like may not be mounted, or all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be performed by another device. Then, in the encoding apparatus 100, part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 1 and the like is implemented, and part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, whereby motion compensation is efficiently performed. It will be.
　［復号装置の実装例］
　図３２は、実施の形態１に係る復号装置２００の実装例を示すブロック図である。復号装置２００は、回路２６０及びメモリ２６２を備える。例えば、図１０に示された復号装置２００の複数の構成要素は、図３２に示された回路２６０及びメモリ２６２によって実装される。 [Implementation example of decryption device]
FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an implementation example of the decoding device 200 according to Embodiment 1. The decoding device 200 includes a circuit 260 and a memory 262. For example, the plurality of components of the decoding device 200 shown in FIG. 10 are implemented by the circuit 260 and the memory 262 shown in FIG.
　回路２６０は、情報処理を行う回路であり、メモリ２６２にアクセス可能な回路である。例えば、回路２６０は、動画像を復号する専用又は汎用の電子回路である。回路２６０は、ＣＰＵのようなプロセッサであってもよい。また、回路２６０は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよい。また、例えば、回路２６０は、図１０等に示された復号装置２００の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素を除く、複数の構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。 The circuit 260 is a circuit that performs information processing and can access the memory 262. For example, the circuit 260 is a dedicated or general-purpose electronic circuit that decodes a moving image. The circuit 260 may be a processor such as a CPU. Also, the circuit 260 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits. Also, for example, the circuit 260 may play the role of a plurality of components excluding the component for storing information among the plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. 10 and the like.
　メモリ２６２は、回路２６０が動画像を復号するための情報が記憶される専用又は汎用のメモリである。メモリ２６２は、電子回路であってもよく、回路２６０に接続されていてもよい。また、メモリ２６２は、回路２６０に含まれていてもよい。また、メモリ２６２は、複数の電子回路の集合体であってもよい。また、メモリ２６２は、磁気ディスク又は光ディスク等であってもよいし、ストレージ又は記録媒体等と表現されてもよい。また、メモリ２６２は、不揮発性メモリでもよいし、揮発性メモリでもよい。 The memory 262 is a dedicated or general-purpose memory in which information for the circuit 260 to decode a moving image is stored. The memory 262 may be an electronic circuit or may be connected to the circuit 260. Also, the memory 262 may be included in the circuit 260. Further, the memory 262 may be a collection of a plurality of electronic circuits. Also, the memory 262 may be a magnetic disk or an optical disk, or may be expressed as a storage or a recording medium. The memory 262 may be either a non-volatile memory or a volatile memory.
　例えば、メモリ２６２には、符号化された動画像に対応するビット列が記憶されてもよいし、復号されたビット列に対応する動画像が記憶されてもよい。また、メモリ２６２には、回路２６０が動画像を復号するためのプログラムが記憶されていてもよい。 For example, in the memory 262, a bit string corresponding to a coded moving image may be stored, or a moving image corresponding to a decoded bit string may be stored. Also, the memory 262 may store a program for the circuit 260 to decode a moving image.
　また、例えば、メモリ２６２は、図１０等に示された復号装置２００の複数の構成要素のうち、情報を記憶するための構成要素の役割を果たしてもよい。具体的には、メモリ２６２は、図１０に示されたブロックメモリ２１０及びフレームメモリ２１４の役割を果たしてもよい。より具体的には、メモリ２６２には、再構成済みブロック及び再構成済みピクチャ等が記憶されてもよい。 Also, for example, the memory 262 may play the role of a component for storing information among the plurality of components of the decoding device 200 illustrated in FIG. 10 and the like. Specifically, the memory 262 may play the role of the block memory 210 and the frame memory 214 shown in FIG. More specifically, the memory 262 may store reconstructed blocks, reconstructed pictures, and the like.
　なお、復号装置２００において、図１０等に示された複数の構成要素の全てが実装されなくてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の全てが行われなくてもよい。図１０等に示された複数の構成要素の一部は、他の装置に含まれていてもよいし、上述された複数の処理の一部は、他の装置によって実行されてもよい。そして、復号装置２００において、図１０等に示された複数の構成要素のうちの一部が実装され、上述された複数の処理の一部が行われることによって、動き補償が効率的に行われる。 In the decoding apparatus 200, all of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like may not be mounted, or all of the plurality of processes described above may not be performed. Some of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like may be included in another device, and some of the plurality of processes described above may be performed by another device. Then, in the decoding device 200, part of the plurality of components shown in FIG. 10 and the like is implemented, and part of the plurality of processes described above is performed, whereby motion compensation is efficiently performed. .
　［補足］
　また、本実施の形態における符号化装置１００及び復号装置２００は、それぞれ、画像符号化装置及び画像復号装置として利用されてもよいし、動画像符号化装置及び動画像復号装置として利用されてもよい。あるいは、符号化装置１００及び復号装置２００は、それぞれ、ループフィルタ装置として利用され得る。 [Supplement]
In addition, coding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 in the present embodiment may be used as an image coding apparatus and an image decoding apparatus, respectively, and may be used as a moving image coding apparatus and a moving image decoding apparatus. Good. Alternatively, the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 may each be used as a loop filter device.
　すなわち、符号化装置１００及び復号装置２００は、それぞれ、ループフィルタ部１２０及びループフィルタ部２１２のみに対応していてもよい。そして、変換部１０６及び逆変換部２０６等の他の構成要素は、他の装置に含まれていてもよい。 That is, encoding apparatus 100 and decoding apparatus 200 may correspond to only loop filter section 120 and loop filter section 212, respectively. Then, other components such as the conversion unit 106 and the inverse conversion unit 206 may be included in other devices.
　また、本実施の形態において、各構成要素は、専用のハードウェアで構成されるか、各構成要素に適したソフトウェアプログラムを実行することによって実現されてもよい。各構成要素は、ＣＰＵ又はプロセッサなどのプログラム実行部が、ハードディスク又は半導体メモリなどの記録媒体に記録されたソフトウェアプログラムを読み出して実行することによって実現されてもよい。 Further, in the present embodiment, each component may be configured by dedicated hardware or implemented by executing a software program suitable for each component. Each component may be realized by a program execution unit such as a CPU or a processor reading and executing a software program recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or a semiconductor memory.
　具体的には、符号化装置１００及び復号装置２００のそれぞれは、処理回路（Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ　Ｃｉｒｃｕｉｔｒｙ）と、当該処理回路に電気的に接続された、当該処理回路からアクセス可能な記憶装置（Ｓｔｏｒａｇｅ）とを備えていてもよい。例えば、処理回路は回路１６０又は２６０に対応し、記憶装置はメモリ１６２又は２６２に対応する。 Specifically, each of the encoding device 100 and the decoding device 200 includes a processing circuit (Processing Circuitry) and a storage device (Storage) electrically connected to the processing circuit and accessible to the processing circuit. You may have. For example, processing circuitry may correspond to circuitry 160 or 260 and storage may correspond to memory 162 or 262.
　処理回路は、専用のハードウェア及びプログラム実行部の少なくとも一方を含み、記憶装置を用いて処理を実行する。また、記憶装置は、処理回路がプログラム実行部を含む場合には、当該プログラム実行部により実行されるソフトウェアプログラムを記憶する。 The processing circuit includes at least one of dedicated hardware and a program execution unit, and executes processing using a storage device. In addition, when the processing circuit includes a program execution unit, the storage device stores a software program executed by the program execution unit.
　ここで、本実施の形態の符号化装置１００又は復号装置２００などを実現するソフトウェアは、次のようなプログラムである。 Here, software for realizing the encoding apparatus 100 or the decoding apparatus 200 of the present embodiment is a program as follows.
　また、各構成要素は、上述の通り、回路であってもよい。これらの回路は、全体として１つの回路を構成してもよいし、それぞれ別々の回路であってもよい。また、各構成要素は、汎用的なプロセッサで実現されてもよいし、専用のプロセッサで実現されてもよい。 Also, each component may be a circuit as described above. These circuits may constitute one circuit as a whole or may be separate circuits. Each component may be realized by a general purpose processor or a dedicated processor.
　また、特定の構成要素が実行する処理を別の構成要素が実行してもよい。また、処理を実行する順番が変更されてもよいし、複数の処理が並行して実行されてもよい。また、符号化復号装置が、符号化装置１００及び復号装置２００を備えていてもよい。 Also, another component may execute the processing that a particular component performs. Further, the order of executing the processing may be changed, or a plurality of processing may be executed in parallel. Further, the coding and decoding apparatus may include the coding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200.
　以上、符号化装置１００及び復号装置２００の態様について、実施の形態に基づいて説明したが、符号化装置１００及び復号装置２００の態様は、この実施の形態に限定されるものではない。本開示の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、当業者が思いつく各種変形を本実施の形態に施したものや、異なる実施の形態における構成要素を組み合わせて構築される形態も、符号化装置１００及び復号装置２００の態様の範囲内に含まれてもよい。 As mentioned above, although the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 was demonstrated based on embodiment, the aspect of the encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 is not limited to this embodiment. The encoding apparatus 100 and the decoding apparatus 200 may be configured by combining various modifications in the present embodiment that may occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit of the present disclosure, or by combining components in different embodiments. It may be included within the scope of the aspect of.
　本態様を本開示における他の態様の少なくとも一部と組み合わせて実施してもよい。また、本態様のフローチャートに記載の一部の処理、装置の一部の構成、シンタックスの一部などを他の態様と組み合わせて実施してもよい。 This aspect may be practiced in combination with at least some of the other aspects in the present disclosure. In addition, part of the processing described in the flowchart of this aspect, part of the configuration of the apparatus, part of the syntax, and the like may be implemented in combination with other aspects.
　（実施の形態２）
　以上の各実施の形態において、機能ブロックの各々は、通常、ＭＰＵ及びメモリ等によって実現可能である。また、機能ブロックの各々による処理は、通常、プロセッサなどのプログラム実行部が、ＲＯＭ等の記録媒体に記録されたソフトウェア（プログラム）を読み出して実行することで実現される。当該ソフトウェアはダウンロード等により配布されてもよいし、半導体メモリなどの記録媒体に記録して配布されてもよい。なお、各機能ブロックをハードウェア（専用回路）によって実現することも、当然、可能である。 Second Embodiment
In each of the above embodiments, each of the functional blocks can usually be realized by an MPU, a memory, and the like. Further, the processing by each of the functional blocks is usually realized by a program execution unit such as a processor reading and executing software (program) recorded in a recording medium such as a ROM. The software may be distributed by downloading or the like, or may be distributed by being recorded in a recording medium such as a semiconductor memory. Of course, it is also possible to realize each functional block by hardware (dedicated circuit).
　また、各実施の形態において説明した処理は、単一の装置（システム）を用いて集中処理することによって実現してもよく、又は、複数の装置を用いて分散処理することによって実現してもよい。また、上記プログラムを実行するプロセッサは、単数であってもよく、複数であってもよい。すなわち、集中処理を行ってもよく、又は分散処理を行ってもよい。 Also, the processing described in each embodiment may be realized by centralized processing using a single device (system), or may be realized by distributed processing using a plurality of devices. Good. Moreover, the processor that executes the program may be singular or plural. That is, centralized processing may be performed, or distributed processing may be performed.
　本開示の態様は、以上の実施例に限定されることなく、種々の変更が可能であり、それらも本開示の態様の範囲内に包含される。 The aspects of the present disclosure are not limited to the above examples, and various modifications are possible, which are also included in the scope of the aspects of the present disclosure.
　さらにここで、上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法（画像符号化方法）又は動画像復号化方法（画像復号方法）の応用例とそれを用いたシステムを説明する。当該システムは、画像符号化方法を用いた画像符号化装置、画像復号方法を用いた画像復号装置、及び両方を備える画像符号化復号装置を有することを特徴とする。システムにおける他の構成について、場合に応じて適切に変更することができる。 Furthermore, an application example of the moving picture coding method (image coding method) or the moving picture decoding method (image decoding method) shown in each of the above-described embodiments and a system using the same will be described. The system is characterized by having an image coding apparatus using an image coding method, an image decoding apparatus using an image decoding method, and an image coding / decoding apparatus provided with both. Other configurations in the system can be suitably modified as the case may be.
　［使用例］
　図３３は、コンテンツ配信サービスを実現するコンテンツ供給システムｅｘ１００の全体構成を示す図である。通信サービスの提供エリアを所望の大きさに分割し、各セル内にそれぞれ固定無線局である基地局ｅｘ１０６、ｅｘ１０７、ｅｘ１０８、ｅｘ１０９、ｅｘ１１０が設置されている。 [Example of use]
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a content supply system ex100 for realizing content distribution service. The area for providing communication service is divided into desired sizes, and base stations ex106, ex107, ex108, ex109 and ex110, which are fixed wireless stations, are installed in each cell.
　このコンテンツ供給システムｅｘ１００では、インターネットｅｘ１０１に、インターネットサービスプロバイダｅｘ１０２又は通信網ｅｘ１０４、及び基地局ｅｘ１０６～ｅｘ１１０を介して、コンピュータｅｘ１１１、ゲーム機ｅｘ１１２、カメラｅｘ１１３、家電ｅｘ１１４、及びスマートフォンｅｘ１１５などの各機器が接続される。当該コンテンツ供給システムｅｘ１００は、上記のいずれかの要素を組合せて接続するようにしてもよい。固定無線局である基地局ｅｘ１０６～ｅｘ１１０を介さずに、各機器が電話網又は近距離無線等を介して直接的又は間接的に相互に接続されていてもよい。また、ストリーミングサーバｅｘ１０３は、インターネットｅｘ１０１等を介して、コンピュータｅｘ１１１、ゲーム機ｅｘ１１２、カメラｅｘ１１３、家電ｅｘ１１４、及びスマートフォンｅｘ１１５などの各機器と接続される。また、ストリーミングサーバｅｘ１０３は、衛星ｅｘ１１６を介して、飛行機ｅｘ１１７内のホットスポット内の端末等と接続される。 In this content supply system ex100, each device such as a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, and a smartphone ex115 via the Internet service provider ex102 or the communication network ex104 and the base stations ex106 to ex110 on the Internet ex101 Is connected. The content supply system ex100 may connect any of the above-described elements in combination. The respective devices may be connected to each other directly or indirectly via a telephone network, near-field radio, etc., not via the base stations ex106 to ex110 which are fixed wireless stations. Also, the streaming server ex103 is connected to each device such as the computer ex111, the game machine ex112, the camera ex113, the home appliance ex114, and the smartphone ex115 via the Internet ex101 or the like. Also, the streaming server ex103 is connected to a terminal or the like in a hotspot in the aircraft ex117 via the satellite ex116.
　なお、基地局ｅｘ１０６～ｅｘ１１０の代わりに、無線アクセスポイント又はホットスポット等が用いられてもよい。また、ストリーミングサーバｅｘ１０３は、インターネットｅｘ１０１又はインターネットサービスプロバイダｅｘ１０２を介さずに直接通信網ｅｘ１０４と接続されてもよいし、衛星ｅｘ１１６を介さず直接飛行機ｅｘ１１７と接続されてもよい。 A radio access point or a hotspot may be used instead of base stations ex106 to ex110. Also, the streaming server ex103 may be directly connected to the communication network ex104 without the internet ex101 or the internet service provider ex102, or may be directly connected with the airplane ex117 without the satellite ex116.
　カメラｅｘ１１３はデジタルカメラ等の静止画撮影、及び動画撮影が可能な機器である。また、スマートフォンｅｘ１１５は、一般に２Ｇ、３Ｇ、３．９Ｇ、４Ｇ、そして今後は５Ｇと呼ばれる移動通信システムの方式に対応したスマートフォン機、携帯電話機、又はＰＨＳ（Ｐｅｒｓｏｎａｌ　Ｈａｎｄｙｐｈｏｎｅ　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ）等である。 The camera ex113 is a device capable of shooting a still image such as a digital camera and shooting a moving image. The smartphone ex115 is a smartphone, a mobile phone, a PHS (Personal Handyphone System), or the like compatible with a mobile communication system generally called 2G, 3G, 3.9G, 4G, and 5G in the future.
　家電ｅｘ１１８は、冷蔵庫、又は家庭用燃料電池コージェネレーションシステムに含まれる機器等である。 The home appliance ex118 is a refrigerator or a device included in a home fuel cell cogeneration system.
　コンテンツ供給システムｅｘ１００では、撮影機能を有する端末が基地局ｅｘ１０６等を通じてストリーミングサーバｅｘ１０３に接続されることで、ライブ配信等が可能になる。ライブ配信では、端末（コンピュータｅｘ１１１、ゲーム機ｅｘ１１２、カメラｅｘ１１３、家電ｅｘ１１４、スマートフォンｅｘ１１５、及び飛行機ｅｘ１１７内の端末等）は、ユーザが当該端末を用いて撮影した静止画又は動画コンテンツに対して上記各実施の形態で説明した符号化処理を行い、符号化により得られた映像データと、映像に対応する音を符号化した音データと多重化し、得られたデータをストリーミングサーバｅｘ１０３に送信する。即ち、各端末は、本開示の一態様に係る画像符号化装置として機能する。 In the content supply system ex100, when a terminal having a photographing function is connected to the streaming server ex103 through the base station ex106 or the like, live distribution and the like become possible. In live distribution, a terminal (a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, a smartphone ex115, a terminal in an airplane ex117, etc.) transmits the still image or moving image content captured by the user using the terminal. The encoding process described in each embodiment is performed, and video data obtained by the encoding and sound data obtained by encoding a sound corresponding to the video are multiplexed, and the obtained data is transmitted to the streaming server ex103. That is, each terminal functions as an image coding apparatus according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
　一方、ストリーミングサーバｅｘ１０３は要求のあったクライアントに対して送信されたコンテンツデータをストリーム配信する。クライアントは、上記符号化処理されたデータを復号化することが可能な、コンピュータｅｘ１１１、ゲーム機ｅｘ１１２、カメラｅｘ１１３、家電ｅｘ１１４、スマートフォンｅｘ１１５、又は飛行機ｅｘ１１７内の端末等である。配信されたデータを受信した各機器は、受信したデータを復号化処理して再生する。即ち、各機器は、本開示の一態様に係る画像復号装置として機能する。 On the other hand, the streaming server ex 103 streams the content data transmitted to the requested client. The client is a computer ex111, a game machine ex112, a camera ex113, a home appliance ex114, a smartphone ex115, a terminal in the airplane ex117, or the like capable of decoding the above-described encoded data. Each device that receives the distributed data decrypts and reproduces the received data. That is, each device functions as an image decoding device according to an aspect of the present disclosure.
　［分散処理］
　また、ストリーミングサーバｅｘ１０３は複数のサーバ又は複数のコンピュータであって、データを分散して処理したり記録したり配信するものであってもよい。例えば、ストリーミングサーバｅｘ１０３は、ＣＤＮ（Ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ　Ｄｅｌｉｖｅｒｙ　Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ）により実現され、世界中に分散された多数のエッジサーバとエッジサーバ間をつなぐネットワークによりコンテンツ配信が実現されていてもよい。ＣＤＮでは、クライアントに応じて物理的に近いエッジサーバが動的に割り当てられる。そして、当該エッジサーバにコンテンツがキャッシュ及び配信されることで遅延を減らすことができる。また、何らかのエラーが発生した場合又はトラフィックの増加などにより通信状態が変わる場合に複数のエッジサーバで処理を分散したり、他のエッジサーバに配信主体を切り替えたり、障害が生じたネットワークの部分を迂回して配信を続けることができるので、高速かつ安定した配信が実現できる。 [Distributed processing]
Also, the streaming server ex103 may be a plurality of servers or a plurality of computers, and may process, record, or distribute data in a distributed manner. For example, the streaming server ex103 may be realized by a CDN (Contents Delivery Network), and content delivery may be realized by a network connecting a large number of edge servers distributed around the world and the edge servers. In the CDN, physically close edge servers are dynamically assigned according to clients. The delay can be reduced by caching and distributing the content to the edge server. In addition, when there is an error or when the communication status changes due to an increase in traffic etc., processing is distributed among multiple edge servers, or the distribution subject is switched to another edge server, or a portion of the network where a failure has occurred. Since the delivery can be continued bypassing, high-speed and stable delivery can be realized.
　また、配信自体の分散処理にとどまらず、撮影したデータの符号化処理を各端末で行ってもよいし、サーバ側で行ってもよいし、互いに分担して行ってもよい。一例として、一般に符号化処理では、処理ループが２度行われる。１度目のループでフレーム又はシーン単位での画像の複雑さ、又は、符号量が検出される。また、２度目のループでは画質を維持して符号化効率を向上させる処理が行われる。例えば、端末が１度目の符号化処理を行い、コンテンツを受け取ったサーバ側が２度目の符号化処理を行うことで、各端末での処理負荷を減らしつつもコンテンツの質と効率を向上させることができる。この場合、ほぼリアルタイムで受信して復号する要求があれば、端末が行った一度目の符号化済みデータを他の端末で受信して再生することもできるので、より柔軟なリアルタイム配信も可能になる。 In addition to the distributed processing of distribution itself, each terminal may perform encoding processing of captured data, or may perform processing on the server side, or may share processing with each other. As an example, generally in the encoding process, a processing loop is performed twice. In the first loop, the complexity or code amount of the image in frame or scene units is detected. In the second loop, processing is performed to maintain the image quality and improve the coding efficiency. For example, the terminal performs a first encoding process, and the server receiving the content performs a second encoding process, thereby improving the quality and efficiency of the content while reducing the processing load on each terminal. it can. In this case, if there is a request to receive and decode in substantially real time, the first encoded data made by the terminal can also be received and reproduced by another terminal, enabling more flexible real time delivery Become.
　他の例として、カメラｅｘ１１３等は、画像から特徴量抽出を行い、特徴量に関するデータをメタデータとして圧縮してサーバに送信する。サーバは、例えば特徴量からオブジェクトの重要性を判断して量子化精度を切り替えるなど、画像の意味に応じた圧縮を行う。特徴量データはサーバでの再度の圧縮時の動きベクトル予測の精度及び効率向上に特に有効である。また、端末でＶＬＣ（可変長符号化）などの簡易的な符号化を行い、サーバでＣＡＢＡＣ（コンテキスト適応型二値算術符号化方式）など処理負荷の大きな符号化を行ってもよい。 As another example, the camera ex 113 or the like extracts a feature amount from an image, compresses data relating to the feature amount as metadata, and transmits the data to the server. The server performs compression according to the meaning of the image, for example, determining the importance of the object from the feature amount and switching the quantization accuracy. Feature amount data is particularly effective in improving the accuracy and efficiency of motion vector prediction at the time of second compression in the server. Also, the terminal may perform simple coding such as VLC (variable length coding) and the server may perform coding with a large processing load such as CABAC (context adaptive binary arithmetic coding method).
　さらに他の例として、スタジアム、ショッピングモール、又は工場などにおいては、複数の端末によりほぼ同一のシーンが撮影された複数の映像データが存在する場合がある。この場合には、撮影を行った複数の端末と、必要に応じて撮影をしていない他の端末及びサーバを用いて、例えばＧＯＰ（Ｇｒｏｕｐ　ｏｆ　Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ）単位、ピクチャ単位、又はピクチャを分割したタイル単位などで符号化処理をそれぞれ割り当てて分散処理を行う。これにより、遅延を減らし、よりリアルタイム性を実現できる。 As still another example, in a stadium, a shopping mall, or a factory, there may be a plurality of video data in which substantially the same scenes are shot by a plurality of terminals. In this case, for example, a unit of GOP (Group of Picture), a unit of picture, or a tile into which a picture is divided, using a plurality of terminals for which photographing was performed and other terminals and servers which are not photographing as necessary. The encoding process is allocated in units, etc., and distributed processing is performed. This reduces delay and can realize more real time performance.
　また、複数の映像データはほぼ同一シーンであるため、各端末で撮影された映像データを互いに参照し合えるように、サーバで管理及び／又は指示をしてもよい。または、各端末からの符号化済みデータを、サーバが受信し複数のデータ間で参照関係を変更、又はピクチャ自体を補正或いは差し替えて符号化しなおしてもよい。これにより、一つ一つのデータの質と効率を高めたストリームを生成できる。 Further, since a plurality of video data are substantially the same scene, the server may manage and / or instruct the video data captured by each terminal to be mutually referred to. Alternatively, the server may receive the encoded data from each terminal and change the reference relationship among a plurality of data, or may correct or replace the picture itself and re-encode it. This makes it possible to generate streams with enhanced quality and efficiency of each piece of data.
　また、サーバは、映像データの符号化方式を変更するトランスコードを行ったうえで映像データを配信してもよい。例えば、サーバは、ＭＰＥＧ系の符号化方式をＶＰ系に変換してもよいし、Ｈ．２６４をＨ．２６５に変換してもよい。 Also, the server may deliver the video data after performing transcoding for changing the coding method of the video data. For example, the server may convert the encoding system of the MPEG system into the VP system, or the H.264 system. H.264. It may be converted to 265.
　このように、符号化処理は、端末、又は１以上のサーバにより行うことが可能である。よって、以下では、処理を行う主体として「サーバ」又は「端末」等の記載を用いるが、サーバで行われる処理の一部又は全てが端末で行われてもよいし、端末で行われる処理の一部又は全てがサーバで行われてもよい。また、これらに関しては、復号処理についても同様である。 Thus, the encoding process can be performed by the terminal or one or more servers. Therefore, in the following, although the description such as "server" or "terminal" is used as the subject of processing, part or all of the processing performed by the server may be performed by the terminal, or the processing performed by the terminal Some or all may be performed on the server. In addition, with regard to these, the same applies to the decoding process.
　［３Ｄ、マルチアングル］
　近年では、互いにほぼ同期した複数のカメラｅｘ１１３及び／又はスマートフォンｅｘ１１５などの端末により撮影された異なるシーン、又は、同一シーンを異なるアングルから撮影した画像或いは映像を統合して利用することも増えてきている。各端末で撮影した映像は、別途取得した端末間の相対的な位置関係、又は、映像に含まれる特徴点が一致する領域などに基づいて統合される。 [3D, multi-angle]
In recent years, it has been increasingly used to integrate and use different scenes captured by terminals such as a plurality of cameras ex113 and / or smartphone ex115 which are substantially synchronized with each other, or images or videos of the same scene captured from different angles. There is. The images captured by each terminal are integrated based on the relative positional relationship between the terminals acquired separately, or an area where the feature points included in the image coincide with each other.
　サーバは、２次元の動画像を符号化するだけでなく、動画像のシーン解析などに基づいて自動的に、又は、ユーザが指定した時刻において、静止画を符号化し、受信端末に送信してもよい。サーバは、さらに、撮影端末間の相対的な位置関係を取得できる場合には、２次元の動画像だけでなく、同一シーンが異なるアングルから撮影された映像に基づき、当該シーンの３次元形状を生成できる。なお、サーバは、ポイントクラウドなどにより生成した３次元のデータを別途符号化してもよいし、３次元データを用いて人物又はオブジェクトを認識或いは追跡した結果に基づいて、受信端末に送信する映像を、複数の端末で撮影した映像から選択、又は、再構成して生成してもよい。 The server not only encodes a two-dimensional moving image, but also automatically encodes a still image based on scene analysis of the moving image or at a time designated by the user and transmits it to the receiving terminal. It is also good. Furthermore, if the server can acquire relative positional relationship between the imaging terminals, the three-dimensional shape of the scene is not only determined based on the two-dimensional moving image but also the video of the same scene captured from different angles. Can be generated. Note that the server may separately encode three-dimensional data generated by a point cloud or the like, or an image to be transmitted to the receiving terminal based on a result of recognizing or tracking a person or an object using the three-dimensional data. Alternatively, it may be generated by selecting or reconfiguring from videos taken by a plurality of terminals.
　このようにして、ユーザは、各撮影端末に対応する各映像を任意に選択してシーンを楽しむこともできるし、複数画像又は映像を用いて再構成された３次元データから任意視点の映像を切り出したコンテンツを楽しむこともできる。さらに、映像と同様に音も複数の相異なるアングルから収音され、サーバは、映像に合わせて特定のアングル又は空間からの音を映像と多重化して送信してもよい。 In this way, the user can enjoy the scene by arbitrarily selecting each video corresponding to each photographing terminal, or from the three-dimensional data reconstructed using a plurality of images or videos, the video of the arbitrary viewpoint You can also enjoy the extracted content. Furthermore, the sound may be picked up from a plurality of different angles as well as the video, and the server may multiplex the sound from a specific angle or space with the video and transmit it according to the video.
　また、近年ではＶｉｒｔｕａｌ　Ｒｅａｌｉｔｙ（ＶＲ）及びＡｕｇｍｅｎｔｅｄ　Ｒｅａｌｉｔｙ（ＡＲ）など、現実世界と仮想世界とを対応付けたコンテンツも普及してきている。ＶＲの画像の場合、サーバは、右目用及び左目用の視点画像をそれぞれ作成し、Ｍｕｌｔｉ－Ｖｉｅｗ　Ｃｏｄｉｎｇ（ＭＶＣ）などにより各視点映像間で参照を許容する符号化を行ってもよいし、互いに参照せずに別ストリームとして符号化してもよい。別ストリームの復号時には、ユーザの視点に応じて仮想的な３次元空間が再現されるように互いに同期させて再生するとよい。 Also, in recent years, content in which the real world and the virtual world are associated, such as Virtual Reality (VR) and Augmented Reality (AR), has also become widespread. In the case of VR images, the server may create viewpoint images for the right eye and for the left eye, respectively, and may perform coding to allow reference between each viewpoint video using Multi-View Coding (MVC) or the like. It may be encoded as another stream without reference. At the time of decoding of another stream, reproduction may be performed in synchronization with each other so that a virtual three-dimensional space is reproduced according to the viewpoint of the user.
　ＡＲの画像の場合には、サーバは、現実空間のカメラ情報に、仮想空間上の仮想物体情報を、３次元的位置又はユーザの視点の動きに基づいて重畳する。復号装置は、仮想物体情報及び３次元データを取得又は保持し、ユーザの視点の動きに応じて２次元画像を生成し、スムーズにつなげることで重畳データを作成してもよい。または、復号装置は仮想物体情報の依頼に加えてユーザの視点の動きをサーバに送信し、サーバは、サーバに保持される３次元データから受信した視点の動きに合わせて重畳データを作成し、重畳データを符号化して復号装置に配信してもよい。なお、重畳データは、ＲＧＢ以外に透過度を示すα値を有し、サーバは、３次元データから作成されたオブジェクト以外の部分のα値が０などに設定し、当該部分が透過する状態で、符号化してもよい。もしくは、サーバは、クロマキーのように所定の値のＲＧＢ値を背景に設定し、オブジェクト以外の部分は背景色にしたデータを生成してもよい。 In the case of an AR image, the server superimposes virtual object information in the virtual space on camera information in the real space based on the three-dimensional position or the movement of the user's viewpoint. The decoding apparatus may acquire or hold virtual object information and three-dimensional data, generate a two-dimensional image according to the movement of the user's viewpoint, and create superimposed data by smoothly connecting. Alternatively, the decoding device transmits the motion of the user's viewpoint to the server in addition to the request for virtual object information, and the server creates superimposed data in accordance with the motion of the viewpoint received from the three-dimensional data held in the server. The superimposed data may be encoded and distributed to the decoding device. Note that the superimposed data has an α value indicating transparency as well as RGB, and the server sets the α value of a portion other than the object created from the three-dimensional data to 0 etc., and the portion is transparent , May be encoded. Alternatively, the server may set RGB values of predetermined values as a background, such as chroma key, and generate data in which the portion other than the object has a background color.
　同様に配信されたデータの復号処理はクライアントである各端末で行っても、サーバ側で行ってもよいし、互いに分担して行ってもよい。一例として、ある端末が、一旦サーバに受信リクエストを送り、そのリクエストに応じたコンテンツを他の端末で受信し復号処理を行い、ディスプレイを有する装置に復号済みの信号が送信されてもよい。通信可能な端末自体の性能によらず処理を分散して適切なコンテンツを選択することで画質のよいデータを再生することができる。また、他の例として大きなサイズの画像データをＴＶ等で受信しつつ、鑑賞者の個人端末にピクチャが分割されたタイルなど一部の領域が復号されて表示されてもよい。これにより、全体像を共有化しつつ、自身の担当分野又はより詳細に確認したい領域を手元で確認することができる。 Similarly, the decryption processing of the distributed data may be performed by each terminal which is a client, may be performed by the server side, or may be performed sharing each other. As one example, one terminal may send a reception request to the server once, the content corresponding to the request may be received by another terminal and decoded, and the decoded signal may be transmitted to a device having a display. Data of high image quality can be reproduced by distributing processing and selecting appropriate content regardless of the performance of the communicable terminal itself. As another example, while receiving image data of a large size by a TV or the like, a viewer's personal terminal may decode and display a partial area such as a tile in which a picture is divided. Thereby, it is possible to confirm at hand the area in which the user is in charge or the area to be checked in more detail while sharing the whole image.
　また今後は、屋内外にかかわらず近距離、中距離、又は長距離の無線通信が複数使用可能な状況下で、ＭＰＥＧ－ＤＡＳＨなどの配信システム規格を利用して、接続中の通信に対して適切なデータを切り替えながらシームレスにコンテンツを受信することが予想される。これにより、ユーザは、自身の端末のみならず屋内外に設置されたディスプレイなどの復号装置又は表示装置を自由に選択しながらリアルタイムで切り替えられる。また、自身の位置情報などに基づいて、復号する端末及び表示する端末を切り替えながら復号を行うことができる。これにより、目的地への移動中に、表示可能なデバイスが埋め込まれた隣の建物の壁面又は地面の一部に地図情報を表示させながら移動することも可能になる。また、符号化データが受信端末から短時間でアクセスできるサーバにキャッシュされている、又は、コンテンツ・デリバリー・サービスにおけるエッジサーバにコピーされている、などの、ネットワーク上での符号化データへのアクセス容易性に基づいて、受信データのビットレートを切り替えることも可能である。 Also, from now on, for communication under connection using a delivery system standard such as MPEG-DASH under a situation where multiple short distance, middle distance or long distance wireless communication can be used regardless of indoor or outdoor. It is expected to receive content seamlessly while switching the appropriate data. As a result, the user can switch in real time while freely selecting not only his own terminal but also a decoding apparatus or display apparatus such as a display installed indoors and outdoors. In addition, decoding can be performed while switching between a terminal to be decoded and a terminal to be displayed, based on own position information and the like. This makes it possible to move while displaying map information on the wall surface or part of the ground of the next building in which the displayable device is embedded while moving to the destination. Also, access to encoded data over the network, such as encoded data being cached on a server that can be accessed in a short time from a receiving terminal, or copied to an edge server in a content delivery service, etc. It is also possible to switch the bit rate of the received data based on ease.
　［スケーラブル符号化］
　コンテンツの切り替えに関して、図３４に示す、上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法を応用して圧縮符号化されたスケーラブルなストリームを用いて説明する。サーバは、個別のストリームとして内容は同じで質の異なるストリームを複数有していても構わないが、図示するようにレイヤに分けて符号化を行うことで実現される時間的／空間的スケーラブルなストリームの特徴を活かして、コンテンツを切り替える構成であってもよい。つまり、復号側が性能という内的要因と通信帯域の状態などの外的要因とに応じてどのレイヤまで復号するかを決定することで、復号側は、低解像度のコンテンツと高解像度のコンテンツとを自由に切り替えて復号できる。例えば移動中にスマートフォンｅｘ１１５で視聴していた映像の続きを、帰宅後にインターネットＴＶ等の機器で視聴したい場合には、当該機器は、同じストリームを異なるレイヤまで復号すればよいので、サーバ側の負担を軽減できる。 [Scalable coding]
Content switching will be described using a scalable stream compression-coded by applying the moving picture coding method shown in each of the above embodiments shown in FIG. The server may have a plurality of streams with the same content but different qualities as individual streams, but is temporally / spatial scalable which is realized by coding into layers as shown in the figure. The configuration may be such that the content is switched using the feature of the stream. That is, the decoding side determines low-resolution content and high-resolution content by determining which layer to decode depending on the internal factor of performance and external factors such as the state of the communication band. It can be switched freely and decoded. For example, when it is desired to view the continuation of the video being watched by the smartphone ex115 while moving on a device such as the Internet TV after returning home, the device only has to decode the same stream to different layers, so the burden on the server side Can be reduced.
　さらに、上記のように、レイヤ毎にピクチャが符号化されており、ベースレイヤの上位にエンハンスメントレイヤが存在するスケーラビリティを実現する構成以外に、エンハンスメントレイヤが画像の統計情報などに基づくメタ情報を含み、復号側が、メタ情報に基づきベースレイヤのピクチャを超解像することで高画質化したコンテンツを生成してもよい。超解像とは、同一解像度におけるＳＮ比の向上、及び、解像度の拡大のいずれであってもよい。メタ情報は、超解像処理に用いる線形或いは非線形のフィルタ係数を特定するため情報、又は、超解像処理に用いるフィルタ処理、機械学習或いは最小２乗演算におけるパラメータ値を特定する情報などを含む。 Furthermore, as described above, the picture is encoded for each layer, and the enhancement layer includes meta information based on statistical information of the image, etc., in addition to the configuration for realizing the scalability in which the enhancement layer exists above the base layer. The decoding side may generate high-quality content by super-resolving a picture of the base layer based on the meta information. The super resolution may be either an improvement in the SN ratio at the same resolution or an expansion of the resolution. Meta information includes information for identifying linear or non-linear filter coefficients used for super-resolution processing, or information for identifying parameter values in filter processing used for super-resolution processing, machine learning or least squares operation, etc. .
　または、画像内のオブジェクトなどの意味合いに応じてピクチャがタイル等に分割されており、復号側が、復号するタイルを選択することで一部の領域だけを復号する構成であってもよい。また、オブジェクトの属性（人物、車、ボールなど）と映像内の位置（同一画像における座標位置など）とをメタ情報として格納することで、復号側は、メタ情報に基づいて所望のオブジェクトの位置を特定し、そのオブジェクトを含むタイルを決定できる。例えば、図３５に示すように、メタ情報は、ＨＥＶＣにおけるＳＥＩメッセージなど画素データとは異なるデータ格納構造を用いて格納される。このメタ情報は、例えば、メインオブジェクトの位置、サイズ、又は色彩などを示す。 Alternatively, the picture may be divided into tiles or the like according to the meaning of an object or the like in the image, and the decoding side may be configured to decode only a part of the area by selecting the tile to be decoded. Also, by storing the attribute of the object (person, car, ball, etc.) and the position in the image (coordinate position in the same image, etc.) as meta information, the decoding side can set the position of the desired object based on the meta information. And determine the tile that contains the object. For example, as shown in FIG. 35, meta information is stored using a data storage structure different from pixel data, such as an SEI message in HEVC. This meta information indicates, for example, the position, size, or color of the main object.
　また、ストリーム、シーケンス又はランダムアクセス単位など、複数のピクチャから構成される単位でメタ情報が格納されてもよい。これにより、復号側は、特定人物が映像内に出現する時刻などが取得でき、ピクチャ単位の情報と合わせることで、オブジェクトが存在するピクチャ、及び、ピクチャ内でのオブジェクトの位置を特定できる。 Also, meta information may be stored in units of a plurality of pictures, such as streams, sequences, or random access units. As a result, the decoding side can acquire the time when a specific person appears in the video and the like, and can identify the picture in which the object exists and the position of the object in the picture by combining the information with the picture unit.
　［Ｗｅｂページの最適化］
　図３６は、コンピュータｅｘ１１１等におけるｗｅｂページの表示画面例を示す図である。図３７は、スマートフォンｅｘ１１５等におけるｗｅｂページの表示画面例を示す図である。図３６及び図３７に示すようにｗｅｂページが、画像コンテンツへのリンクであるリンク画像を複数含む場合があり、閲覧するデバイスによってその見え方は異なる。画面上に複数のリンク画像が見える場合には、ユーザが明示的にリンク画像を選択するまで、又は画面の中央付近にリンク画像が近付く或いはリンク画像の全体が画面内に入るまでは、表示装置（復号装置）は、リンク画像として各コンテンツが有する静止画又はＩピクチャを表示したり、複数の静止画又はＩピクチャ等でｇｉｆアニメのような映像を表示したり、ベースレイヤのみ受信して映像を復号及び表示したりする。 Web Page Optimization
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page in the computer ex111 and the like. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a web page in the smartphone ex115 and the like. As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, a web page may include a plurality of link images which are links to image content, and the appearance differs depending on the viewing device. When multiple link images are visible on the screen, the display device until the user explicitly selects the link image, or until the link image approaches near the center of the screen or the entire link image falls within the screen The (decoding device) displays still images or I pictures of each content as link images, displays images such as gif animation with a plurality of still images or I pictures, etc., receives only the base layer Decode and display.
　ユーザによりリンク画像が選択された場合、表示装置は、ベースレイヤを最優先にして復号する。なお、ｗｅｂページを構成するＨＴＭＬにスケーラブルなコンテンツであることを示す情報があれば、表示装置は、エンハンスメントレイヤまで復号してもよい。また、リアルタイム性を担保するために、選択される前又は通信帯域が非常に厳しい場合には、表示装置は、前方参照のピクチャ（Ｉピクチャ、Ｐピクチャ、前方参照のみのＢピクチャ）のみを復号及び表示することで、先頭ピクチャの復号時刻と表示時刻との間の遅延（コンテンツの復号開始から表示開始までの遅延）を低減できる。また、表示装置は、ピクチャの参照関係を敢えて無視して全てのＢピクチャ及びＰピクチャを前方参照にして粗く復号し、時間が経ち受信したピクチャが増えるにつれて正常の復号を行ってもよい。 When the link image is selected by the user, the display device decodes the base layer with the highest priority. Note that the display device may decode up to the enhancement layer if there is information indicating that the content is scalable in the HTML configuring the web page. Also, in order to secure real-time capability, the display device decodes only forward referenced pictures (I picture, P picture, forward referenced only B picture) before the selection or when the communication band is very strict. And, by displaying, it is possible to reduce the delay between the decoding time of the leading picture and the display time (delay from the start of decoding of the content to the start of display). In addition, the display device may roughly ignore the reference relationship of pictures and roughly decode all B pictures and P pictures with forward reference, and may perform normal decoding as time passes and the number of received pictures increases.
　［自動走行］
　また、車の自動走行又は走行支援のため２次元又は３次元の地図情報などの静止画又は映像データを送受信する場合、受信端末は、１以上のレイヤに属する画像データに加えて、メタ情報として天候又は工事の情報なども受信し、これらを対応付けて復号してもよい。なお、メタ情報は、レイヤに属してもよいし、単に画像データと多重化されてもよい。 [Auto run]
In addition, when transmitting or receiving still image or video data such as two-dimensional or three-dimensional map information for automatic traveling or driving assistance of a car, the receiving terminal is added as image information belonging to one or more layers as meta information Information on weather or construction may also be received, and these may be correlated and decoded. The meta information may belong to the layer or may be simply multiplexed with the image data.
　この場合、受信端末を含む車、ドローン又は飛行機などが移動するため、受信端末は、当該受信端末の位置情報を受信要求時に送信することで、基地局ｅｘ１０６～ｅｘ１１０を切り替えながらシームレスな受信及び復号を実現できる。また、受信端末は、ユーザの選択、ユーザの状況又は通信帯域の状態に応じて、メタ情報をどの程度受信するか、又は地図情報をどの程度更新していくかを動的に切り替えることが可能になる。 In this case, since a car including a receiving terminal, a drone or an airplane moves, the receiving terminal transmits the position information of the receiving terminal at the time of reception request to seamlessly receive and decode while switching the base stations ex106 to ex110. Can be realized. In addition, the receiving terminal can dynamically switch how much meta information is received or how much map information is updated according to the user's selection, the user's situation or the state of the communication band. become.
　以上のようにして、コンテンツ供給システムｅｘ１００では、ユーザが送信した符号化された情報をリアルタイムでクライアントが受信して復号し、再生することができる。 As described above, in the content providing system ex100, the client can receive, decode, and reproduce the encoded information transmitted by the user in real time.
　［個人コンテンツの配信］
　また、コンテンツ供給システムｅｘ１００では、映像配信業者による高画質で長時間のコンテンツのみならず、個人による低画質で短時間のコンテンツのユニキャスト、又はマルチキャスト配信が可能である。また、このような個人のコンテンツは今後も増加していくと考えられる。個人コンテンツをより優れたコンテンツにするために、サーバは、編集処理を行ってから符号化処理を行ってもよい。これは例えば、以下のような構成で実現できる。 [Distribution of personal content]
Further, in the content supply system ex100, not only high-quality and long-time content by a video distribution company but also unicast or multicast distribution of low-quality and short-time content by an individual is possible. In addition, such personal content is expected to increase in the future. In order to make the personal content more excellent, the server may perform the encoding process after performing the editing process. This can be realized, for example, with the following configuration.
　撮影時にリアルタイム又は蓄積して撮影後に、サーバは、原画又は符号化済みデータから撮影エラー、シーン探索、意味の解析、及びオブジェクト検出などの認識処理を行う。そして、サーバは、認識結果に基いて手動又は自動で、ピントずれ又は手ブレなどを補正したり、明度が他のピクチャに比べて低い又は焦点が合っていないシーンなどの重要性の低いシーンを削除したり、オブジェクトのエッジを強調したり、色合いを変化させるなどの編集を行う。サーバは、編集結果に基いて編集後のデータを符号化する。また撮影時刻が長すぎると視聴率が下がることも知られており、サーバは、撮影時間に応じて特定の時間範囲内のコンテンツになるように上記のように重要性が低いシーンのみならず動きが少ないシーンなどを、画像処理結果に基き自動でクリップしてもよい。または、サーバは、シーンの意味解析の結果に基づいてダイジェストを生成して符号化してもよい。 At the time of shooting, the server performs recognition processing such as shooting error, scene search, meaning analysis, and object detection from the original image or encoded data after shooting in real time or by accumulation. Then, the server manually or automatically corrects out-of-focus or camera shake, etc. based on the recognition result, or a scene with low importance such as a scene whose brightness is low or out of focus compared with other pictures. Make edits such as deleting, emphasizing the edge of an object, or changing the color. The server encodes the edited data based on the edited result. It is also known that the audience rating drops when the shooting time is too long, and the server works not only with scenes with low importance as described above, but also moves as content becomes within a specific time range according to the shooting time. Scenes with a small amount of motion may be clipped automatically based on the image processing result. Alternatively, the server may generate and encode a digest based on the result of semantic analysis of the scene.
　なお、個人コンテンツには、そのままでは著作権、著作者人格権、又は肖像権等の侵害となるものが写り込んでいるケースもあり、共有する範囲が意図した範囲を超えてしまうなど個人にとって不都合な場合もある。よって、例えば、サーバは、画面の周辺部の人の顔、又は家の中などを敢えて焦点が合わない画像に変更して符号化してもよい。また、サーバは、符号化対象画像内に、予め登録した人物とは異なる人物の顔が映っているかどうかを認識し、映っている場合には、顔の部分にモザイクをかけるなどの処理を行ってもよい。または、符号化の前処理又は後処理として、著作権などの観点からユーザが画像を加工したい人物又は背景領域を指定し、サーバは、指定された領域を別の映像に置き換える、又は焦点をぼかすなどの処理を行うことも可能である。人物であれば、動画像において人物をトラッキングしながら、顔の部分の映像を置き換えることができる。 In some cases, there are cases where personal content may infringe copyright, author's personality right, portrait right, etc. as it is, and it is inconvenient for the individual, such as the range of sharing exceeds the intended range. There are also cases. Thus, for example, the server may change and encode the face of a person at the periphery of the screen, or the inside of a house, etc. into an image out of focus. In addition, the server recognizes whether or not the face of a person different from the person registered in advance appears in the image to be encoded, and if so, performs processing such as mosaicing the face portion. May be Alternatively, the user designates a person or background area desired to process an image from the viewpoint of copyright etc. as preprocessing or post-processing of encoding, and the server replaces the designated area with another video or blurs the focus. It is also possible to perform such processing. If it is a person, it is possible to replace the image of the face part while tracking the person in the moving image.
　また、データ量の小さい個人コンテンツの視聴はリアルタイム性の要求が強いため、帯域幅にもよるが、復号装置は、まずベースレイヤを最優先で受信して復号及び再生を行う。復号装置は、この間にエンハンスメントレイヤを受信し、再生がループされる場合など２回以上再生される場合に、エンハンスメントレイヤも含めて高画質の映像を再生してもよい。このようにスケーラブルな符号化が行われているストリームであれば、未選択時又は見始めた段階では粗い動画だが、徐々にストリームがスマートになり画像がよくなるような体験を提供することができる。スケーラブル符号化以外にも、１回目に再生される粗いストリームと、１回目の動画を参照して符号化される２回目のストリームとが１つのストリームとして構成されていても同様の体験を提供できる。 Also, since viewing of personal content with a small amount of data has a strong demand for real-time performance, the decoding apparatus first receives the base layer with the highest priority, and performs decoding and reproduction, although it depends on the bandwidth. The decoding device may receive the enhancement layer during this period, and may play back high-quality video including the enhancement layer if it is played back more than once, such as when playback is looped. In the case of a stream in which scalable coding is performed as described above, it is possible to provide an experience in which the stream gradually becomes smart and the image becomes better although it is a rough moving image when it is not selected or when it starts watching. Besides scalable coding, the same experience can be provided even if the coarse stream played back first and the second stream coded with reference to the first moving image are configured as one stream .
　［その他の使用例］
　また、これらの符号化又は復号処理は、一般的に各端末が有するＬＳＩｅｘ５００において処理される。ＬＳＩｅｘ５００は、ワンチップであっても複数チップからなる構成であってもよい。なお、動画像符号化又は復号用のソフトウェアをコンピュータｅｘ１１１等で読み取り可能な何らかの記録メディア（ＣＤ－ＲＯＭ、フレキシブルディスク、又はハードディスクなど）に組み込み、そのソフトウェアを用いて符号化又は復号処理を行ってもよい。さらに、スマートフォンｅｘ１１５がカメラ付きである場合には、そのカメラで取得した動画データを送信してもよい。このときの動画データはスマートフォンｅｘ１１５が有するＬＳＩｅｘ５００で符号化処理されたデータである。 [Other use cases]
Also, these encoding or decoding processes are generally processed in an LSI ex 500 that each terminal has. The LSI ex 500 may be a single chip or a plurality of chips. Software for moving image encoding or decoding is incorporated in any recording medium (CD-ROM, flexible disk, hard disk, etc.) readable by computer ex111 or the like, and encoding or decoding is performed using the software. It is also good. Furthermore, when the smartphone ex115 is equipped with a camera, moving image data acquired by the camera may be transmitted. The moving image data at this time is data encoded by the LSI ex 500 included in the smartphone ex 115.
　なお、ＬＳＩｅｘ５００は、アプリケーションソフトをダウンロードしてアクティベートする構成であってもよい。この場合、端末は、まず、当該端末がコンテンツの符号化方式に対応しているか、又は、特定サービスの実行能力を有するかを判定する。端末がコンテンツの符号化方式に対応していない場合、又は、特定サービスの実行能力を有さない場合、端末は、コーデック又はアプリケーションソフトをダウンロードし、その後、コンテンツ取得及び再生する。 The LSI ex 500 may be configured to download and activate application software. In this case, the terminal first determines whether the terminal corresponds to the content coding scheme or has the ability to execute a specific service. If the terminal does not support the content encoding method or does not have the ability to execute a specific service, the terminal downloads the codec or application software, and then acquires and reproduces the content.
　また、インターネットｅｘ１０１を介したコンテンツ供給システムｅｘ１００に限らず、デジタル放送用システムにも上記各実施の形態の少なくとも動画像符号化装置（画像符号化装置）又は動画像復号化装置（画像復号装置）のいずれかを組み込むことができる。衛星などを利用して放送用の電波に映像と音が多重化された多重化データを載せて送受信するため、コンテンツ供給システムｅｘ１００のユニキャストがし易い構成に対してマルチキャスト向きであるという違いがあるが符号化処理及び復号処理に関しては同様の応用が可能である。 Further, the present invention is not limited to the content supply system ex100 via the Internet ex101, but is also applicable to at least a moving picture coding apparatus (image coding apparatus) or a moving picture decoding apparatus (image decoding apparatus) of the above embodiments Can be incorporated. There is a difference in that it is multicast-oriented with respect to the configuration in which the content supply system ex100 can be easily unicasted, since multiplexed data in which video and sound are multiplexed is transmitted on broadcast radio waves using satellites etc. Similar applications are possible for the encoding process and the decoding process.
　［ハードウェア構成］
　図３８は、スマートフォンｅｘ１１５を示す図である。また、図３９は、スマートフォンｅｘ１１５の構成例を示す図である。スマートフォンｅｘ１１５は、基地局ｅｘ１１０との間で電波を送受信するためのアンテナｅｘ４５０と、映像及び静止画を撮ることが可能なカメラ部ｅｘ４６５と、カメラ部ｅｘ４６５で撮像した映像、及びアンテナｅｘ４５０で受信した映像等が復号されたデータを表示する表示部ｅｘ４５８とを備える。スマートフォンｅｘ１１５は、さらに、タッチパネル等である操作部ｅｘ４６６と、音声又は音響を出力するためのスピーカ等である音声出力部ｅｘ４５７と、音声を入力するためのマイク等である音声入力部ｅｘ４５６と、撮影した映像或いは静止画、録音した音声、受信した映像或いは静止画、メール等の符号化されたデータ、又は、復号化されたデータを保存可能なメモリ部ｅｘ４６７と、ユーザを特定し、ネットワークをはじめ各種データへのアクセスの認証をするためのＳＩＭｅｘ４６８とのインタフェース部であるスロット部ｅｘ４６４とを備える。なお、メモリ部ｅｘ４６７の代わりに外付けメモリが用いられてもよい。 [Hardware configuration]
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the smartphone ex115. Further, FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the smartphone ex115. The smartphone ex115 receives an antenna ex450 for transmitting and receiving radio waves to and from the base station ex110, a camera unit ex465 capable of taking video and still images, a video taken by the camera unit ex465, and the antenna ex450 And a display unit ex <b> 458 for displaying data obtained by decoding an image or the like. The smartphone ex115 further includes an operation unit ex466 that is a touch panel or the like, a voice output unit ex457 that is a speaker or the like for outputting voice or sound, a voice input unit ex456 that is a microphone or the like for inputting voice, Identify the user, the memory unit ex 467 capable of storing encoded video or still image, recorded voice, received video or still image, encoded data such as mail, or decoded data, and specify a network, etc. And a slot unit ex464 that is an interface unit with the SIM ex 468 for authenticating access to various data. Note that an external memory may be used instead of the memory unit ex467.
　また、表示部ｅｘ４５８及び操作部ｅｘ４６６等を統括的に制御する主制御部ｅｘ４６０と、電源回路部ｅｘ４６１、操作入力制御部ｅｘ４６２、映像信号処理部ｅｘ４５５、カメラインタフェース部ｅｘ４６３、ディスプレイ制御部ｅｘ４５９、変調／復調部ｅｘ４５２、多重／分離部ｅｘ４５３、音声信号処理部ｅｘ４５４、スロット部ｅｘ４６４、及びメモリ部ｅｘ４６７とがバスｅｘ４７０を介して接続されている。 Further, a main control unit ex460 that integrally controls the display unit ex458 and the operation unit ex466, a power supply circuit unit ex461, an operation input control unit ex462, a video signal processing unit ex455, a camera interface unit ex463, a display control unit ex459, / Demodulation unit ex452, multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453, audio signal processing unit ex454, slot unit ex464, and memory unit ex467 are connected via a bus ex470.
　電源回路部ｅｘ４６１は、ユーザの操作により電源キーがオン状態にされると、バッテリパックから各部に対して電力を供給することによりスマートフォンｅｘ１１５を動作可能な状態に起動する。 When the power supply key is turned on by the user's operation, the power supply circuit unit ex461 activates the smartphone ex115 to an operable state by supplying power from the battery pack to each unit.
　スマートフォンｅｘ１１５は、ＣＰＵ、ＲＯＭ及びＲＡＭ等を有する主制御部ｅｘ４６０の制御に基づいて、通話及データ通信等の処理を行う。通話時は、音声入力部ｅｘ４５６で収音した音声信号を音声信号処理部ｅｘ４５４でデジタル音声信号に変換し、これを変調／復調部ｅｘ４５２でスペクトラム拡散処理し、送信／受信部ｅｘ４５１でデジタルアナログ変換処理及び周波数変換処理を施した後にアンテナｅｘ４５０を介して送信する。また受信データを増幅して周波数変換処理及びアナログデジタル変換処理を施し、変調／復調部ｅｘ４５２でスペクトラム逆拡散処理し、音声信号処理部ｅｘ４５４でアナログ音声信号に変換した後、これを音声出力部ｅｘ４５７から出力する。データ通信モード時は、本体部の操作部ｅｘ４６６等の操作によってテキスト、静止画、又は映像データが操作入力制御部ｅｘ４６２を介して主制御部ｅｘ４６０に送出され、同様に送受信処理が行われる。データ通信モード時に映像、静止画、又は映像と音声を送信する場合、映像信号処理部ｅｘ４５５は、メモリ部ｅｘ４６７に保存されている映像信号又はカメラ部ｅｘ４６５から入力された映像信号を上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法によって圧縮符号化し、符号化された映像データを多重／分離部ｅｘ４５３に送出する。また、音声信号処理部ｅｘ４５４は、映像又は静止画等をカメラ部ｅｘ４６５で撮像中に音声入力部ｅｘ４５６で収音した音声信号を符号化し、符号化された音声データを多重／分離部ｅｘ４５３に送出する。多重／分離部ｅｘ４５３は、符号化済み映像データと符号化済み音声データを所定の方式で多重化し、変調／復調部（変調／復調回路部）ｅｘ４５２、及び送信／受信部ｅｘ４５１で変調処理及び変換処理を施してアンテナｅｘ４５０を介して送信する。 The smartphone ex115 performs processing such as call and data communication based on control of the main control unit ex460 having a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like. At the time of a call, the audio signal collected by the audio input unit ex456 is converted to a digital audio signal by the audio signal processing unit ex454, spread spectrum processing is performed by the modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and digital analog conversion is performed by the transmission / reception unit ex451. After processing and frequency conversion processing, transmission is performed via the antenna ex450. Further, the received data is amplified and subjected to frequency conversion processing and analog-to-digital conversion processing, subjected to spectrum despreading processing by modulation / demodulation unit ex452, and converted to an analog sound signal by sound signal processing unit ex454. Output from In the data communication mode, text, still images, or video data are sent to the main control unit ex460 via the operation input control unit ex462 by the operation of the operation unit ex466 or the like of the main unit, and transmission and reception processing is similarly performed. In the case of transmitting video, still images, or video and audio in the data communication mode, the video signal processing unit ex 455 executes the video signal stored in the memory unit ex 467 or the video signal input from the camera unit ex 465 as described above. The video data is compressed and encoded by the moving picture encoding method shown in the form and the encoded video data is sent to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453. Further, the audio signal processing unit ex454 encodes an audio signal collected by the audio input unit ex456 while capturing a video or a still image with the camera unit ex465, and sends the encoded audio data to the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453. Do. The multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 multiplexes the encoded video data and the encoded audio data according to a predetermined method, and performs modulation processing and conversion by the modulation / demodulation unit (modulation / demodulation circuit unit) ex452 and the transmission / reception unit ex451. It processes and transmits via antenna ex450.
　電子メール又はチャットに添付された映像、又はウェブページ等にリンクされた映像を受信した場合、アンテナｅｘ４５０を介して受信された多重化データを復号するために、多重／分離部ｅｘ４５３は、多重化データを分離することにより、多重化データを映像データのビットストリームと音声データのビットストリームとに分け、同期バスｅｘ４７０を介して符号化された映像データを映像信号処理部ｅｘ４５５に供給するとともに、符号化された音声データを音声信号処理部ｅｘ４５４に供給する。映像信号処理部ｅｘ４５５は、上記各実施の形態で示した動画像符号化方法に対応した動画像復号化方法によって映像信号を復号し、ディスプレイ制御部ｅｘ４５９を介して表示部ｅｘ４５８から、リンクされた動画像ファイルに含まれる映像又は静止画が表示される。また音声信号処理部ｅｘ４５４は、音声信号を復号し、音声出力部ｅｘ４５７から音声が出力される。なおリアルタイムストリーミングが普及しているため、ユーザの状況によっては音声の再生が社会的にふさわしくない場も起こりえる。そのため、初期値としては、音声信号は再生せず映像データのみを再生する構成の方が望ましい。ユーザが映像データをクリックするなど操作を行った場合にのみ音声を同期して再生してもよい。 When a video attached to an e-mail or a chat or a video linked to a web page or the like is received, the multiplexing / demultiplexing unit ex453 multiplexes in order to decode multiplexed data received via the antenna ex450. By separating the data, the multiplexed data is divided into a bit stream of video data and a bit stream of audio data, and the encoded video data is supplied to the video signal processing unit ex455 via the synchronization bus ex470, and The converted audio data is supplied to the audio signal processing unit ex 454. The video signal processing unit ex 455 decodes the video signal by the moving picture decoding method corresponding to the moving picture coding method described in each of the above embodiments, and is linked from the display unit ex 458 via the display control unit ex 459. An image or a still image included in the moving image file is displayed. The audio signal processing unit ex 454 decodes the audio signal, and the audio output unit ex 457 outputs the audio. Furthermore, since real-time streaming is widespread, depending on the user's situation, it may happen that sound reproduction is not socially appropriate. Therefore, as an initial value, it is preferable to have a configuration in which only the video data is reproduced without reproducing the audio signal. Audio may be synchronized and played back only when the user performs an operation such as clicking on video data.
　またここではスマートフォンｅｘ１１５を例に説明したが、端末としては符号化器及び復号化器を両方持つ送受信型端末の他に、符号化器のみを有する送信端末、及び、復号化器のみを有する受信端末という３通りの実装形式が考えられる。さらに、デジタル放送用システムにおいて、映像データに音声データなどが多重化された多重化データを受信又は送信するとして説明したが、多重化データには、音声データ以外に映像に関連する文字データなどが多重化されてもよいし、多重化データではなく映像データ自体が受信又は送信されてもよい。 Also, although the smartphone ex115 has been described as an example, in addition to a transceiving terminal having both an encoder and a decoder as a terminal, a transmitting terminal having only the encoder and a receiver having only the decoder There are three possible implementation forms: terminals. Furthermore, in the digital broadcasting system, it has been described that multiplexed data in which audio data is multiplexed with video data is received or transmitted, but in multiplexed data, character data related to video other than audio data is also described. It may be multiplexed, or video data itself may be received or transmitted, not multiplexed data.
　なお、ＣＰＵを含む主制御部ｅｘ４６０が符号化又は復号処理を制御するとして説明したが、端末はＧＰＵを備えることも多い。よって、ＣＰＵとＧＰＵで共通化されたメモリ、又は共通に使用できるようにアドレスが管理されているメモリにより、ＧＰＵの性能を活かして広い領域を一括して処理する構成でもよい。これにより符号化時間を短縮でき、リアルタイム性を確保し、低遅延を実現できる。特に動き探索、デブロックフィルタ、ＳＡＯ（Ｓａｍｐｌｅ　Ａｄａｐｔｉｖｅ　Ｏｆｆｓｅｔ）、及び変換・量子化の処理を、ＣＰＵではなく、ＧＰＵでピクチャなどの単位で一括して行うと効率的である。 Although the main control unit ex 460 including the CPU is described as controlling the encoding or decoding process, the terminal often includes a GPU. Therefore, a configuration in which a large area is collectively processed using the performance of the GPU may be performed using a memory shared by the CPU and the GPU, or a memory whose address is managed so as to be commonly used. As a result, coding time can be shortened, real time property can be secured, and low delay can be realized. In particular, it is efficient to perform processing of motion search, deblock filter, sample adaptive offset (SAO), and transform / quantization collectively in units of pictures or the like on the GPU instead of the CPU.
　本態様を本開示における他の態様の少なくとも一部と組み合わせて実施してもよい。また、本態様のフローチャートに記載の一部の処理、装置の一部の構成、シンタックスの一部などを他の態様と組み合わせて実施してもよい。 This aspect may be practiced in combination with at least some of the other aspects in the present disclosure. In addition, part of the processing described in the flowchart of this aspect, part of the configuration of the apparatus, part of the syntax, and the like may be implemented in combination with other aspects.
　本開示は、例えば、テレビジョン受像機、デジタルビデオレコーダー、カーナビゲーション、携帯電話、デジタルカメラ、デジタルビデオカメラ、テレビ会議システム、又は、電子ミラー等に利用可能である。 The present disclosure is applicable to, for example, television receivers, digital video recorders, car navigation systems, mobile phones, digital cameras, digital video cameras, video conference systems, electronic mirrors, and the like.
　　１００　符号化装置
　　１０２　分割部
　　１０４　減算部
　　１０６　変換部
　　１０８　量子化部
　　１１０　エントロピー符号化部
　　１１２、２０４　逆量子化部
　　１１４、２０６　逆変換部
　　１１６、２０８　加算部
　　１１８、２１０　ブロックメモリ
　　１２０、２１２　ループフィルタ部
　　１２２、２１４　フレームメモリ
　　１２４、２１６　イントラ予測部
　　１２６、２１８　インター予測部
　　１２８、２２０　予測制御部
　　１６０、２６０　回路
　　１６２、２６２　メモリ
　　２００　復号装置
　　２０２　エントロピー復号部 Reference Signs List 100 encoder 102 division unit 104 subtraction unit 106 transformation unit 108 quantization unit 110 entropy encoding unit 112, 204 inverse quantization unit 114, 206 inverse transformation unit 116, 208 addition unit 118, 210 block memory 120, 212 loop filter Unit 122, 214 Frame memory 124, 216 Intra prediction unit 126, 218 Inter prediction unit 128, 220 Prediction control unit 160, 260 Circuit 162, 262 Memory 200 Decoding device 202 Entropy decoding unit

Claims (14)

  1. 　回路と、
    　メモリと、を備え、
    　前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、
    　対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する前記輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、
    　前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない
    　符号化装置。     Circuit,
    With memory,
    The circuit uses the memory to
    The difference between the first luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction processing of the predicted image for the target block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction processing for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is determined from a predetermined threshold. If it is larger, deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block,
    When the difference is smaller than the threshold, the deblocking filtering process is not applied to the boundary.
  2. 　前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックの一方に対して前記輝度補正処理を適用し、前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックの他方に対して前記輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する
    　請求項１記載の符号化装置。     When the luminance correction process is applied to one of the target block and the adjacent block, and the luminance correction process is not applied to the other of the target block and the adjacent block, the deblocking filter process is performed on the boundary. The encoding device according to claim 1 to apply.
  3. 　前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとのいずれに対しても前記輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない
    　請求項２記載の符号化装置。     The encoding device according to claim 2, wherein the deblocking filter process is not applied to the boundary when the luminance correction process is not applied to any of the target block and the adjacent block.
  4. 　前記輝度補正処理はＬＩＣ（Ｌｏｃａｌ　Ｉｌｌｕｍｉｎａｔｉｏｎ　Ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ）処理である
    　請求項１～３のいずれか１項に記載の符号化装置。     The encoding apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the brightness correction process is a LIC (Local Illumination Compensation) process.
  5. 　前記差が前記閾値より大きい場合、前記境界の境界強度を示すＢｓを０以外の値に設定することで、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、
    　前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記Ｂｓを０に設定することで、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない
    　請求項１～４のいずれか１項に記載の符号化装置。     When the difference is larger than the threshold value, the deblocking filter process is applied to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than 0,
    5. The encoding device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the deblocking filtering is not applied to the boundary by setting the Bs to 0 when the difference is smaller than the threshold.
  6. 　前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックは、予測処理の単位ブロックである
    　請求項１～５のいずれか１項に記載の符号化装置。     The encoding apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the target block and the adjacent block are unit blocks of prediction processing.
  7. 　回路と、
    　メモリと、を備え、
    　前記回路は、前記メモリを用いて、
    　対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する前記輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、
    　前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない
    　復号装置。     Circuit,
    With memory,
    The circuit uses the memory to
    The difference between the first luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction processing of the predicted image for the target block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction processing for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is determined from a predetermined threshold. If it is larger, deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block,
    When the difference is smaller than the threshold, the deblocking filtering process is not applied to the boundary.
  8. 　前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックの一方に対して前記輝度補正処理を適用し、前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックの他方に対して前記輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用する
    　請求項７記載の復号装置。     When the luminance correction process is applied to one of the target block and the adjacent block, and the luminance correction process is not applied to the other of the target block and the adjacent block, the deblocking filter process is performed on the boundary. The decoding device according to claim 7 which applies.
  9. 　前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとのいずれに対しても前記輝度補正処理を適用しない場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない
    　請求項８記載の復号装置。     The decoding device according to claim 8, wherein the deblocking filtering process is not applied to the boundary when the luminance correction process is not applied to any of the target block and the adjacent block.
  10. 　前記輝度補正処理はＬＩＣ（Ｌｏｃａｌ　Ｉｌｌｕｍｉｎａｔｉｏｎ　Ｃｏｍｐｅｎｓａｔｉｏｎ）処理である
    　請求項７～９のいずれか１項に記載の復号装置。     The decoding device according to any one of claims 7 to 9, wherein the brightness correction process is a LIC (Local Illumination Compensation) process.
  11. 　前記差が前記閾値より大きい場合、前記境界の境界強度を示すＢｓを０以外の値に設定することで、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、
    　前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記Ｂｓを０に設定することで、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない
    　請求項７～１０のいずれか１項に記載の復号装置。     When the difference is larger than the threshold value, the deblocking filter process is applied to the boundary by setting Bs indicating the boundary strength of the boundary to a value other than 0,
    The decoding device according to any one of claims 7 to 10, wherein the deblocking filtering is not applied to the boundary by setting the Bs to 0 when the difference is smaller than the threshold.
  12. 　前記対象ブロック及び前記隣接ブロックは、予測処理の単位ブロックである
    　請求項７～１１のいずれか１項に記載の復号装置。     The decoding device according to any one of claims 7 to 11, wherein the target block and the adjacent block are unit blocks of prediction processing.
  13. 　対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する前記輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、
    　前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない
    　符号化方法。     The difference between the first luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction processing of the predicted image for the target block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction processing for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is determined from a predetermined threshold. If it is larger, deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block,
    When the difference is smaller than the threshold, the deblocking filtering process is not applied to the boundary.
  14. 　対象ブロックに対する予測画像の輝度補正処理に用いた第１輝度補正パラメータと、前記対象ブロックに隣接する隣接ブロックに対する前記輝度補正処理に用いた第２輝度補正パラメータとの差が予め定められた閾値より大きい場合、前記対象ブロックと前記隣接ブロックとの境界にデブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用し、
    　前記差が前記閾値より小さい場合、前記境界に前記デブロッキングフィルタ処理を適用しない
    　復号方法。     The difference between the first luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction processing of the predicted image for the target block and the second luminance correction parameter used in the luminance correction processing for the adjacent block adjacent to the target block is determined from a predetermined threshold. If it is larger, deblocking filtering is applied to the boundary between the target block and the adjacent block,
    When the difference is smaller than the threshold, the deblocking filtering process is not applied to the boundary.
PCT/JP2018/041169 2017-11-15 2018-11-06 Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method WO2019098092A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201762586461P 2017-11-15 2017-11-15
US62/586,461 2017-11-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019098092A1 true WO2019098092A1 (en) 2019-05-23

Family

ID=66537790

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/041169 WO2019098092A1 (en) 2017-11-15 2018-11-06 Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TW201924334A (en)
WO (1) WO2019098092A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114556923A (en) * 2019-10-03 2022-05-27 华为技术有限公司 Encoder, decoder and corresponding method using interpolation filtering

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012095228A (en) * 2010-10-28 2012-05-17 Canon Inc Image encoding device and control method thereof, and program and storage medium
JP2013243702A (en) * 2012-02-23 2013-12-05 Square Enix Holdings Co Ltd Video distribution server, video reproducer, control method, program, and recording medium

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012095228A (en) * 2010-10-28 2012-05-17 Canon Inc Image encoding device and control method thereof, and program and storage medium
JP2013243702A (en) * 2012-02-23 2013-12-05 Square Enix Holdings Co Ltd Video distribution server, video reproducer, control method, program, and recording medium

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
GWANG HOON PARK ET AL.: "MVC Deblocking for Illumination Compensation", 22. JVT MEETING; 79. MPEG MEETING; 13-01-2007 - 20-01-2007; MARRAKECH,MA- JVT-V033, no. JVT-V033, 10 January 2007 (2007-01-10), pages 1 - 19, XP030006841 *
JIANLE CHEN ET AL.: "Algorithm Description of Joint Exploration Test Model 2", JOINT VIDEO EXPLORATION TEAM (JVET) OF ITU-T SG 16 WP 3 AND ISO/IEC JTC 1/SC 29/WG 11, JVET-B1001_V3, 25 March 2016 (2016-03-25), pages 14 - 15, XP055436454 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114556923A (en) * 2019-10-03 2022-05-27 华为技术有限公司 Encoder, decoder and corresponding method using interpolation filtering
CN114556923B (en) * 2019-10-03 2023-03-10 华为技术有限公司 Encoder, decoder and corresponding method using interpolation filtering

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201924334A (en) 2019-06-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6765520B2 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method
JP7087030B2 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method
WO2019022099A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
JP2021048619A (en) Encoder and encoding method
JPWO2019155971A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method
JP7026747B2 (en) Decoding device and decoding method
JP7001822B2 (en) Decoding device and decoding method
WO2019138998A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
JP7017580B2 (en) Decoding device, image decoding device and decoding method
WO2019013235A1 (en) Coding device, coding method, decoding device and decoding method
WO2019009129A1 (en) Coding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method
WO2019013236A1 (en) Coding device, coding method, decoding device and decoding method
JP2022093625A (en) Encoder, decoder, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2019069782A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
JP6767579B2 (en) Encoding device, coding method, decoding device and decoding method
WO2019009314A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
JP6874159B2 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method
WO2019124191A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2019082985A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
WO2019059107A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
WO2019065329A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method and decoding method
WO2019069902A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2019021803A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method
WO2019031369A1 (en) Coding device, decoding device, coding method and decoding method
WO2019098092A1 (en) Encoding device, decoding device, encoding method, and decoding method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18879900

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18879900

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1